Home

Programming & Operation Manual

1. Figure 4 Discrete Input Figure 5 RR Input P24 PS v Le p5 Si ver 560 0 18k A 10k RES RR R p i a 15k D Toat OL ae 5x A O1 pF m mpedance S um A P 4 Configured Sink may be configured Source Figure 6 RX Input Figure 7 VI II Input P5 560 18k A 10k 1k Voltage vi i RX Conversion J Tabet A Circuit Impedance 01 mf isi OL we 69k ee v Input 0 1 uf Impedance i V 5000 a an 91 75 79 75 v PE VI and II inputs may not be used simultaneously Figure 8 P24 Output Figure 9 PP Output P24 P24 gt P24 Fuse d PP 10 VDC lt output Voltage 5 100 mA bive Transfer 4 VDC at i 0l pf 50 mA O01 uf vox 47 oF A y Max V V V Fuse resets after high current is removed Figure 10 OUT1 OUT2 Output Figure 11 FP Output P pauses q B84 Programmable ryt P24 PS Input 2A 250VAC eoan a A H i r l autivitire l L A l N ep Z l l S _ its 32 A ea ae eee Fi l l 50 mA max J 2 1 AL w Lakea 4 v Figure 12 FM AM Output Figure 13 Fault Relay active fault Programmable 2A 250VAC ELA 4 7K Low Pass 1A 250VAC ELB FM AM Filter lt Bs AE x Circuit Programmable 10 VDC Sh eavesovac OE puy Max ot uf 20 mA Max V v 14 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Man
2. Program Menu Navigation Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Paremetet Number PROTECTION Reiry Restart Search Method F314 PARAMETERS Configuration Search Inertia F315 Ridethrough Mode F302 Und i Ridethrough Time F310 ndervoltage Ridethrough Undervoltage Stall Level F629 Undervoltage Trip Enable Disable F627 Undervoltage Detection Time F628 OL Reduction Starting Frequency F606 Motor 150 OL Time Limit F607 Overload Soft Stall Enable Disable F017 Motor Overload Trip Enable Disable NIA V f Motor Enable Disable Trip Settings Trip Save at Power Down Enable Disable F602 Cooling Fan Control Cooling Fan Control Mode F620 Cumulative Run Timer Cumulative Run Timer Alarm Setting F621 Phase Loss Output Phase Loss Detection Enable Disable F605 Low Current Settings Low Current Trip Alarm Configuration F610 Abnormal Speed Detection Filter Time F622 Abnormal Speed Settings Overspeed Detection Frequency Range F623 Speed Drop Detection Frequency Range F624 Short Circuit Pulse Run Command F613 Short Circuit Detect Pulse PR Short Circuit Pulse Run Duration F614 Overtorque Trip Enable Disable F615 Overtorque Trip Alarm Level During Power F616 Operation Overtorque Settings Overtorque Trip Alarm Level During F617 Regeneration Overtorque Detection Time F618 g Braking Trouble Internal Timer F630 Brake Fault Timer Release After Run Timer F632 Supply Volt
3. Terminal Terminal Function ar Name Mput Output default setting if programmable Gireuit Config ST Standby Multifunctional programmable discrete input Activation required for normal ASD operation RES Reset Multifunctional programmable discrete input F Discrete Input Forward Multifunctional programmable discrete input R Connect to CC Reverse Multifunctional programmable discrete input Figure 4 on pg 14 to activate S1 Sink mode Preset Speed 1 Multifunctional programmable discrete input S2 Preset Speed 2 Multifunctional programmable discrete input s3 Preset Speed 3 Multifunctional programmable discrete input S4 Emergency Off Multifunctional programmable discrete input OUT1 Low Speed Multifunctional programmable discrete output i i igure 10 on pg 14 OUT2 Reach Frequency Multifunctional programmable discrete output Switched FLC Output Fault Relay Common FLB Fault Relay Normally closed contact Figure 13 on pg 14 FLA Fault Relay Normally open contact RR Frequency Mode 1 Multifunction programmable analog input 0 0 Fig r 5 on pe T to 10 volt input 0 Hz to Maximum Frequency j RX Unassigned Multifunctional programmable analog input 10 to 10 FigureGonpg 14 Analog Input VDC input Unassigned ll Frequency Mode 2 Multifunctional programmable analog input 4 0 to 20 mADC input
4. Q Stop Reset Key LCD Display Displays configuration information performance data e g motor frequency bus voltage output power etc and diagnostic information Enter Key Selects a menu item to be changed or accepts and records the changed data of the selected field same as pressing the Rotary Encoder Up Key Increases the value of the selected parameter or scrolls up the menu listing continues during press and hold Down Key Decreases the value of the selected parameter or scrolls down the menu listing continues during press and hold Rotary Encoder Functions as the Up key the Down key and the Enter key Turn the Rotary Encoder either clockwise or counterclockwise to perform the Up or Down key functions Press the Rotary Encoder to perform the Enter function Press the Rotary Encoder while turning to increase the effectiveness of the Rotary Encoder The Up Down Clockwise Counter Clockwise Rotary Encoder relationship to menu changes may be changed via Program EOI Options gt Encoder Action gt Encoder Direction UP Up may be set to clockwise or counter clockwise ESC Key Returns to the previous level of the menu tree toggles between the Panel screen and the Frequency Command screens or cancels changes made to a field if pressed while still in the reverse video mode dark background light text The 3 functions are menu specific Stop Reset Key If press
5. sccsscscsscsscsscsssscssscsssccessssssscsssseeeesens 29 ROOt MENUS 22ic vises a A E tdoantdous bees duesdeuaceouenceden ses 29 Frequency Command Screen sisir racore sncvesbusssrcsssstbeepevsnstezeseteasedesesseveuns gt 29 Monitor SCTE cndecacdeadbivsuescsavestenss ceessdenpezenseaecnenssesivesestebdlesaeteestiusteunaes 30 Program MOde iescccczssvcnsestsceurensssnccedvesstsdeesueenfescs sopsuseseag tos vaecsasteensstnasearesetacanenrss 32 Direct Access Parameter Information scscssscssssssscscesssssseeessesssccessesesesssessesseeses 45 Direct Access Parameters NUMDETS ccsccececsseeesceeeeeesseceececeeecaeeeaeecneeeeaeceeeenaes 45 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual i Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Alarms Trips and Troubleshooting ssscccccssssssssssecssscsseeecssssscssscessesseseessseeees 168 Alam and THPS ereere e EE Ear e EEEE E EEEO E EEE E EAE A E TE EE 168 Jena i A E EEE E A E E E 169 Wer Notihcation CODES cisedet eased secasvsinsedncte conde Eeoae E reota E n E a aT i EN orena TENSE 171 Trips FaU liS sss sect evesncteesovesceusta venseeasteahesytesstenspacnes seepsabus Oa E TERTE EE EPERE TEER N 172 Wie Wine Trip LNLOLM AMON eseis ooer aerar E TEE E E ENEA Ere EERENS 176 Clearing a Trip vis s siscevisssedcscvtisecdesavensaniesecuseesesteunsenvesesoedescuvteceda eave eesbsbnasenssenes 176 HX7 ASD Programming and Op
6. 100 0 Units HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F174 F177 Motor 3 Base Frequency Program gt Motor Parameters gt Motor Set 3 The Motor 3 Base Frequency setting is the frequency at which the output voltage of the ASD reaches its maximum setting The Maximum Output Voltage is set at F175 This parameter is used only when the parameters for motor set 3 are configured and selected Motor set 3 may be selected by a properly configured input terminal For proper motor operation the Base Frequency should be set for the name plated frequency of the motor Direct Access Number F174 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 60 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 25 0 Maximum 299 0 Units Hz Motor 3 Max Output Voltage Program Motor Parameters gt Motor Set 3 The Motor 3 Maximum Output Voltage is the Motor 3 output voltage at the Base Frequency F174 Regardless of the programmed value the output voltage cannot be higher than the input voltage The actual output voltage will be influenced by the input voltage of the ASD and the Supply Voltage Compensation setting F307 This parameter is used only when the parameters for motor set 3 are configured and selected Motor set 3 may be selected by a properly configured input terminal Direct Access Number
7. RX2 Bias Adjust Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints gt RX2 gt Bias This parameter is used to fine tune the bias of the RX2 input terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control or the Torque Control mode This setting may be used to ensure that the zero level of the input source pot pressure transducer flow meter etc is also the zero level setting of the ASD system This is accomplished by setting the input source to zero and either increasing or decreasing this setting to provide a zero output from the ASD Direct Access Number F476 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 99 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 255 RX2 Gain Adjust Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints RX2 gt Gain This parameter is used to fine tune the gain of the RX2 input terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control or the Torque Control mode This setting may be used to ensure that the 100 level of the input source pot pressure transducer flow meter etc is also the 100 level setting of the ASD system This is accomplished by setting the input source to 100 and either increasing or decreasing this setting to provide an output of 100 from the ASD Direct Access Number F477 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 141 Change
8. 0 0 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz Motor 1 Base Frequency Program gt Fundamental Parameters gt Motor Set 1 The Base Frequency setting determines the frequency at which the output voltage of the ASD reaches its maximum setting The maximum voltage setting cannot be more that the input voltage see Maximum Output Voltage at F306 There are four Base Frequency profile settings 1 4 Note For proper motor operation the Base Frequency is normally set for the name plated frequency of the motor HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F014 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 60 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 25 0 Maximum 299 0 Units Hz 49 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F 015 F016 V f Pattern Program gt Fundamental Parameters gt Frequency Settings This function establishes the relationship between the output frequency and the output voltage Settings Constant Torque Variable Torque Automatic Torque Boost Sensorless Vector Control speed Auto Torque Boost with Automatic Energy Savings Sensorless Vector Control speed with Automatic Energy Savings V f 5 Point Setting opens 5 point setting screen Sensorless Vector Control speed torque switching PG Feedback Vector Control speed torque switching PG Feedback Vector Control sp
9. Direct Access Number F133 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default LL Changeable During Run No HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F134 F140 OUT5 Terminal Assignment Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters gt Output Terminal Assignment gt 5 This parameter sets the functionality of the OUTS terminals to 1 of the 62 possible functions that are listed in Table 7 on pg 167 The on and off delay times of the OUTS terminals may be adjusted to provide more response time to the device that is connected to the output terminals In addition the output terminals must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed Direct Access Number F134 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default UL Changeable During Run No OUT6 Terminal Assignment Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters gt Output Terminal Assignment gt 6 This parameter sets the functionality of the OUT6 terminals to 1 of the 62 possible functions that are listed in Table 7 on pg 167 The on and off delay times of the OUT6 terminals may be adjusted to provide more response time to the device that is connected to the output terminals In addition the output terminals must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed Direct Access Number F135 Parameter Type Selection List Factory D
10. Direct Access Number F229 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum Max Freq F011 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz BIN Speed Reference 2 Program gt Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints gt BIN This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the binary input when the discrete input terminals are used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode or the Torque Control mode See BIN Speed Reference 1 for further information on this setting when used for Speed control or Torque control This parameter sets BIN Speed Reference 2 and is the input signal that is associated with the setting of BIN Speed Frequency 1 while operating in the Speed Control mode or is associated with the BIN Torque Reference Setpoint 2 while operating in the Torque control mode F230 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 100 0 Units BIN Speed Frequency 2 Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints gt BIN This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the binary input when the discrete input terminals are used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode This parameter sets BIN Speed Frequency 2 and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of BIN Spe
11. F175 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 600 0 Units Volts Motor 3 Torque Boost Program Motor Parameters gt Motor Set 3 The Motor 3 Torque Boost function is used to increase the low frequency torque for high inertia loads by increasing the output voltage at frequencies below 1 2 of the 3 Base Frequency setting F174 See parameter F016 Motor 1 Torque Boost for an explanation of torque boost This parameter is used only when the parameters for motor set 3 are configured and selected Motor set 3 may be selected by a properly configured input terminal F176 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD dependent Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 30 0 Units Electronic Thermal Protection 3 Program Motor Parameters gt Motor Set 3 The Motor 3 Electronic Thermal Protection parameter specifies the motor overload current level for motor set 3 This value is entered as either a percentage of the full load rating of the ASD or as the FLA of the motor The unit of measurement for this parameter may be set to Amps V A or it may be set as a percentage of the ASD rating The name plated FLA of the motor may be entered directly when Amps is selected as the unit of measurement see F701 to change the display unit Electronic Thermal Pro
12. If Automatic Accel Decel is not enabled the Acceleration screen will appear followed by the Deceleration screen as shown below Acceleration Time Ee Wizard Acceleration Time What is your acceleration time Volts per Hertz This function establishes the relationship between the output frequency and the output voltage of the ASD Settings Constant Torque Variable Torque Automatic Torque Boost Sensorless Vector Control Speed Automatic Torque Boost Automatic Energy Savings Deceleration Time Wizard Deceleration Time What is your deceleration time Wizard Volts Hertz What type of volts hertz control do you want Constant Torque Sensorless Vector Control Speed Automatic Energy Savings V f 5 point Setting Opens 5 point Setting Screen Sensorless Vector Control Speed Torque Switching PG Feedback Vector Control Speed Torque Switching PG Feedback Vector Control Speed Position Switching Motor Current Rating This parameter allows the user to input the full load amperage FLA of the motor This value is used by the HX7 ASD to determine the Thermal Overload protection setting for the motor and may be found on the nameplate of the motor 22 Wizard Motor Current What is the rated current of your motor HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Command Source T
13. RXB 6 Gnd Gnd 7 RS232 RS485 CNU3 Pin 7 7 Open Open 8 Gnd Gnd 8 Gnd Gnd CN3 Pinout CN3 of the Control Board is used for 2 wire RS485 serial communications Pin Number ene Eipout Controller PCBA 1 RS485 Signal 2 RS485 Signal 3 RS485 Signal Gnd 4 Shield Note CNU2 or CNU3 may be used for RS485 communication Cannot use both simultaneously CN7 Pinout CN7 of the Control Board connects to CN7A of the Terminal Board Table 2 CN7 pinout assignments Programmable terminals are listed as their default settings Pin Number Function Pin Number Function 1 PP 14 II 2 FL 15 S1 3 VI 16 R 4 RR 17 S3 5 FM 18 S2 6 RX 19 N15 7 FP 20 S4 8 AM 21 P15 9 OUT1 22 P24 10 OUT2 23 CC 11 ST 24 CC 12 RES 25 CC 13 F Note Open collector outputs HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual 13 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net I O Circuit Configurations
14. 32767 Encoder Pulses RR Input VII Input RX Input RX2 Input FM Output used for factory testing only AM Output used for factory testing only Meter Adjust Value Analog Output 100 Load Torque 150 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Table 7 Discrete Output Terminal Assignment Selections Function Function 0 Lower Limit LL 31 Ready for Operation including ST and RUN 1 Upper Limit UL 32 Ready for Operation 2 Low speed setting of F100 33 POFF Alarm poor control power supply 3 RCH Acc Dec completion 34 System Consistent Sequence BR brake release 4 RCH speed specified at F101 35 In Alarm Status 5 Fault FL all 36 Forward Speed Limit torque control 6 Fault FL except EF or OCL 37 Reverse Speed Limit torque control 7 Overcurrent Pre alarm 38 ASD Healthy Output 8 ASD Overload Pre alarm 39 Abnormal Communication Alarm 2 internal cause 9 Motor Pre alarm 40 Error Code Output 1 6 bit error output 10 Overheat Pre alarm 41 Error Code Output 2 6 bit error output 11 Overvoltage Pre alarm 42 Error Code Output 3 6 bit error output 12 DC Voltage Low Alarm 43 Error Code Output 4 6 bit error output 13 Low current Alarm 44 Error Code Output 5 6
15. F190 Program gt Special Control Parameters gt V f Five Point Setting Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 The Custom V f Five Point Setting 1 Frequency setting establishes the Ch ble During R N frequency that is to be associated with the voltage setting of F191 Custom V f Spee aca a Five Point Setting 1 Voltage Minimum 0 0 The V f five point settings define a custom volts per hertz relationship for the Maximum 299 startup output of the ASD Units Hz To enable this function set the V f Pattern F015 selection to Custom V f Curve Custom V f Curves may be useful in starting high inertia loads such as rotary drum vacuum filters Jutput Voltage 1 F199 F197 F195 F193 7 4 FIQAS i _ Output f f Frequency Hz ow Ov a 2 R Z a amp a Custom V f Five Point Setting 1 Voltage Direct Access Number F191 Program gt Special Control Parameters gt V f Five Point Setting Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 The Custom V f Five Point Setting 1 Voltage establishes the percentage of Ch ble Durine R N the output voltage that is to be associated with the frequency setting of F190 men rene een eee Custom V f Five Point Setting 1 Frequency Minimum 0 0 See F190 for additional information on custom V f curves Maximum 100 0 Units Custom V f Five Point Setting 2 Frequency Direct Access Number F192 Program gt Special Control Parameters gt V f Fiv
16. Motor Parameters gt Motor Settings This parameter identifies the type of motor being used Settings Toshiba EQP IN TEFC Toshiba EQP IN ODP Toshiba EPACT TEFC Toshiba EPACT ODP Other Motor F413 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Toshiba EQP III TEFC Changeable During Run No Direct Access Number 116 Motor Constant 3 Enable Program Motor Parameters Vector Motor Model This parameter Enables Disables tuning of Motor Constant 3 during an Autotune Settings Disabled Enabled box checked Direct Access Number F414 Parameter Type Check Box Factory Default Enable Changeable During Run No HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F420 F422 Torque Command Program Torque Setting Parameters Torque Control When operating in the Torque Control mode this parameter allows the user to select the source of the torque command signal Settings VIAL RR RX RX2 option LED Keypad Option Binary BCD Input Common Serial TTL RS232 RS485 Communication Card Direct Access Number F420 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default RX Changeable During Run Yes Torque Command Filter Program Torque Setting Parameters Torque Control This parameter reduces the motor vibration caused by large inertia loads A small value w
17. No dynamic braking resistor DBR installed Deceleration time is too short Improper DBR setup information Defective IGBT7 or IGBT7 ckt 3 phase input voltage is above specification DBR Overload Deceleration time is too short DBR setting adjustment required Overvoltage Stall setting adjustment required GND Fault Ground fault at the motor Ground fault at the output of the ASD Current leakage to Earth Ground Ctrl EEPROM Err Internal EEPROM malfunction EEPROM Write Err EEPROM write malfunction E Off Emergency Off command received via EOI or remotely Encoder Loss Encoder signal missing while running during closed loop operation Flash Error Flash memory malfunction Gate Array Error Defective Gate Array or Gate Array malfunction In put Phase Loss 3 phase input to the ASD is low or missing Load Drooping e Load requirement is in excess of the capabilities of the motor Load End OC e Improper wiring at the ASD output to the motor Under Curr ent Trip e Improper Low Current detection level setting Main EEPROM Err e Internal EEPROM malfunction Motor Overload e V f setting needs to be adjusted Motor is locked Continuous operation at low speed Load requirement exceeds ability of the motor Startup frequency setting adjustment required Option PCB Error Optional device malfunction Improper system settings at ASD or optio
18. Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 2 00 Units Seconds RS232 RS485 Master Output Program gt Communication Setting Parameters Communication Settings In a master follower configuration this setting determines the output parameter of the master ASD that will be used to control the applicable follower ASDs Note Select No Follower if F806 is configured as a Master Output controller Otherwise an EOI failure will result Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled Off then On for the changes to take effect Settings No Follower normal operation Frequency Reference Output Command Frequency Torque Command Output Torque Command F826 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default No Follower normal operation Changeable During Run Yes Communication Error Program Communication Setting Parameters Communication Error In the event of a communication error during a transmission the command that was transmitted may be cleared or held Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled Off then On for the changes to take effect Settings Command Request Cleared Command Request Held HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual F830 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default Command
19. This output terminal produces an output current that is proportional to the magnitude of the function assigned to this terminal The available assignments for this output terminal are listed in Table 7 on page 174 The default setting is Output Current see F670 FM This output terminal produces an output current that is proportional to the magnitude of the function assigned to this terminal The available assignments for this output terminal are listed in Table 7 on page 174 The default setting is Output Frequency see F005 FLC FLC is the common leg of a single pole double throw form C relay The FL relay is the Fault Relay by default but may be programmed to any of the selections of Table 8 on page 175 see F132 and Figure 1 FLB One of two contacts that under user defined conditions connect to FLC see Figure 1 FLA One of two contacts that under user defined conditions connect to FLC see Figure 1 Note The FLA and FLC contacts are rated at 2A 250 VAC The FLB contact is rated at 1A 250 VAC Figure 1 FLA FLB and FLC switching contacts shown in the de energized state The relay is shown in the Faulted or de energized condition During normal system operation the relay connection is FLC to FLA 10 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Figure 2 Terminal Board SW1 and SW2 may be switched to
20. This setting may be used to ensure that the zero level of the input source pot pressure transducer flow meter etc is also the zero level setting of the ASD system This is accomplished by setting the input source to zero and either increasing or decreasing this setting to provide an output of zero from the ASD Direct Access Number F472 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 120 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 255 RR Gain Adjust Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints gt RR gt Gain This parameter is used to fine tune the gain of the RR input terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control or the Torque Control mode This setting may be used to ensure that the 100 level of the input source pot pressure transducer flow meter etc is also the 100 level setting of the ASD system This is accomplished by setting the input source to 100 and either increasing or decreasing this setting to provide an output of 100 from the ASD F473 Parameter Type Numerical Direct Access Number Factory Default 61 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 255 124 RX Bias Adjust Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints gt RX gt Bias This parameter is used to fine tune the bias of the RX input terminal when this terminal is used as the contr
21. VI Frequency Mode 2 Multifunctional programmable analog input 0 to 10 VDC input Output Current Produces an output current that is proportional to the Figure 7 on pg 14 AM Analog Output magnitude of the function assigned to this terminal Figure 12 on pg 14 FM Output Frequency Same as AM terminal P24 24 VDC 50 mA max output Figure 8 on pg 14 DC Output pp 10 0 VDC 10 mA max output to be used with an external PP Figure 9 on pg 14 potentiometer is Output Frequency an output pulse train that has a frequency which is FP Pulsed Output F 11 14 aaa a based on the output frequency of the ASD ee CC Control common Do Not connect to Earth Gnd All terminals reference CC 8 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net I O Terminal Descriptions Note The programmable terminal assignments may be accessed and changed from their default settings as mapped on pg 40 or via the Direct Access method Program gt Direct Access gt applicable parameter number See the section titled Program Mode on pg 40 for the applicable Direct Access parameter numbers For further information on terminal assignments and default setting changes see the sections titled Default Setting Changes on pg 27 and Terminal Selection Parameters on pg 42 Note Se
22. e QOverspeed Error or Key Error See the section titled General Safety Information on pg 1 for further information on this setting HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F303 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 00 Maximum 10 99 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F304 F306 Dynamic Braking Enable Program Protection Parameters Dynamic Braking not used This parameter Enables Disables the Dynamic Braking system Settings Enabled with Overload Disabled Dynamic Braking Dynamic Braking uses the inertial energy of the load to produce a braking force or it may be used to reduce the bus voltage in an attempt to preclude an overvoltage trip during deceleration The inertial energy of the load drives the rotor and induces a current into the stator of the motor The induced stator current energy is dissipated through a resistive load The resistive load is connected across terminals PA and PB non polarized Using a low value high wattage resistance as a load for the generated current the resistive load dissipates the induced energy The dissipated energy is the energy that would otherwise have caused the rotor to continue to rotate Dynamic Braking helps to slow the load quickly it cannot act as a holding brake The Dynamic Braking functio
23. e System is regenerating e Load instability e Disable the Ridethrough function F302 OT Overtorque Torque requirement in excess ASD is not correctly matched to the application of the setting of p aramerer e Parameter F616 or F617 setting is too low F616 or F617 for a time longer than the setting of e Obstructed load parameter F618 POFF Control Undervoltage condition at the e Defective Control board Undervoltage 5 15 or the 24 VDC supply Excessive load on power supply e Low input voltage PtSt Reference Two speed reference e Two speed reference frequency setpoints are too Point frequency setpoint values are close to each other increase the difference too close to each other Reset ignored if active 170 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net EOI Display Function Description Possible Causes UC Undercurrent Output current of the ASD is below the level defined at parameter F611 and remains there for the time set at parameter F612 Reset ignored if active User Notification Codes The User Notification codes appear on the Frequency Command screen while the associated function is active User Notification codes notify the user of active functions that are usually only momentary under normal conditions and are active for the duration of activation onl
24. 0 0 Control mode or the Torque Control mode Maxinumn 1000 RR Input Speed Control Setup Units Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Speed control input at the RR input terminal Frequency Settings e Program gt Fundamental Parameters gt Standard Mode Selection gt Frequency Mode 1 gt RR a a ns po I e Program gt Fundamental Parameters gt Standard Mode Selection gt If Command Mode gt Use Control Terminal Strip R 1g Speed lA Set RR Speed Reference 1 F210 the input signal level that Ret 2 represents RR Speed Frequency 1 e Set RR Speed Frequency 1 F211 102 e Set RR Speed Reference 2 F212 the input signal level that ale z represents RR Speed Frequency 2 Dutput Frequency i Set RR Speed Frequency 2 F213 Hea RR SEE e ee be wes e Provide a Run command F and or R Note The speed control Once set as the RR input changes the output frequency of the ASD will vary response may be further in accordance with the above settings ner trimmed by adjusting the This parameter sets RR Speed Reference 1 and is the input signal level that is Bias and Gain settings associated with the setting of RR Speed Frequency 1 while operating in the Speed Control mode RR Input Torque Control Setup Torque Settings Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Torque control input 212 Tm toon at the RR input termi
25. 0 0 Maximum Max Freq Units Hz LOD Start Time Direct Access Number F733 Program gt Special Control Parameters Low Output Disable Function Parameter Type Numerical LOD Start Time Factory Default 0 0 The Low Output Disable Start Time sets the amount of time that the LOD Changeable During Run Yes Start Level criteria must be met and maintained for the LOD function to be Minimum 0 0 initiated Maximum 3600 0 Units Seconds LOD Setpoint Boost Hz Direct Access Number F734 Program gt Special Control Parameters gt Low Output Disable Function Parameter Type Numerical LOD Setpoint Boost Hz Factory Default 0 0 The Low Output Disable feature adds the user input frequency value to the Changeable During Run Yes commanded frequency Minimum 0 0 Maximum Max Freq Units Hz LOD Boost Time Direct Access Number F735 Program gt Special Control Parameters Low Output Disable Function Parameter Type Numerical gt LOD Boost Time Factory Default 0 0 The Low Output Disable Boost Time sets the on time timer for the LOD Changeable During Run Yes Boost function Minimum 0 0 Once expired the LOD Boost function ceases Maximum 3600 0 Units Seconds LOD Feedback Level Hz Direct Access Number F736 Program gt Special Control Parameters gt Low Output Disable Function Parameter Type Numerical LOD Feedback Level Hz Factory Default 0 0 The L
26. 1 F270 and is used when multiple frequencies are to be jumped see the plus or minus value setting at F273 When multiple jump frequencies overlap the system will recognize the lowest and the highest frequencies as one jump range Direct Access Number F272 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz Jump Frequency 2 Bandwidth Program Special Control Parameters gt Jump Frequencies This parameter establishes a plus or minus value for Jump Frequency 2 F272 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual F273 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 30 0 Units Hz 95 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F274 F288 Jump Frequency 3 Direct Access Number F274 Program gt Special Control Parameters gt Jump Frequencies Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Same as Jump Frequency 1 F270 and is used when multiple frequencies are Ch ble Durine R Fa to be jumped see the plus or minus value setting at F275 When multiple ADEGAS MUTNE SUN ELES jump frequencies overlap the system will recognize the lowest and the highest Minimum 0 00 frequencies as one jump range Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz Jump Freq
27. 40 161 Communication Internal 158 Communication Reference Adjust 40 Communication Setting Parameters 39 Communication Settings 39 Communications Speed Frequency 1 160 Communications Speed Frequency 2 160 Communications Speed Reference 1 159 Communications Speed Reference 2 160 Compensation Coefficient for Iron Loss 127 concerns about this publication 1 Constant Vector Control 126 Continued Stall Until Trip During Power Operation 123 Contrast adjustment 32 Control Board 12 Control Terminal Strip 8 CPU Error 172 Crane Hoist Load 42 Ctrl EEPROM Err 173 Ctrl Undervolts 172 Cumulative Run Timer 37 Cumulative Run Timer Alarm Setting 146 Current Control Integral Gain 111 Current Control Proportional Gain 111 Current Differential Gain 123 Current Vector Control 126 Custom V f Five Point Setting 1 Frequency 71 Custom V f Five Point Setting 1 Voltage 71 Custom V f Five Point Setting 2 Frequency 71 Custom V f Five Point Setting 2 Voltage 72 Custom V f Five Point Setting 3 Frequency 72 Custom V f Five Point Setting 3 Voltage 72 Custom V f Five Point Setting 4 Frequency 72 Custom V f Five Point Setting 4 Voltage 72 Custom V f Five Point Setting 5 Frequency 72 Custom V f Five Point Setting 5 Voltage 73 D Date and Time Setting 32 DBR Load 31 DBR Overcurrent 173 DBR Overload 30 173 DC Braking 36 DC Injection Braking Current 92 DC Injection Braking Start Frequency
28. 92 DC Injection Braking Time 92 Dead Time Compensation 43 Dead Time Compensation Enable 127 Dead time Compensation Bias 127 Decel 1 Time 48 Decel 2 Time 128 Decel 3 Time 131 178 Decel 4 Time 132 Deceleration Time Adjustment 150 Default Setting Changes 19 Default Term Setting 8 Derate Threshold frequency 98 Direct Access 32 Direct Access Parameter Information 45 Direct Access Parameters Numbers 45 Direction 31 Direction of motor rotation 48 Discrete Input 8 Discrete Output 8 Display Units 33 Display Units for Voltage and Current 153 Disposal 3 Down Key 17 Driving Torque Limit 1 121 Driving Torque Limit 2 121 Driving Torque Limit 3 122 Driving Torque Limit 4 122 Drooping 103 Drooping Control 39 Drooping Gain 103 Drooping Insensitive Torque Range 103 Drooping Output Filter 103 Drooping Reference 104 Dynamic Braking 36 100 Dynamic Braking Enable 100 E Earth Fault Alarm Level 148 Earth Fault Alarm Time 149 Earth Fault Trip Level 149 Earth Fault Trip Time 149 EEPROM Write Err 173 Electronic Gear Setting 110 Electronic Operator Interface 17 Electronic Thermal Protection 1 142 Electronic Thermal Protection 2 68 Electronic Thermal Protection 3 69 Electronic Thermal Protection 4 70 Emergency Off DC Injection Application Time 143 Emergency Off Mode Settings 143 Emergency Off Setting 36 EMG 169 Encoder Action 32 Encoder Loss
29. After reaching the root level continued ESC entries will toggle the system to and from the Frequency Command screen and the Panel screen Note Panel menu changes entered here will affect EOI controlled ASD operation only 18 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net System Operation Operation Local A CAUTION Read and understand all safety warnings before operating this equipment To run the motor perform the following steps 1 Press the MON PROG key until the Frequency Command screen is displayed see Figure 20 on pg 37 2 Place the system in the Local mode green Local LED illuminated by pressing the LocallRemote key 3 Ensure that there are no personnel around or near the motor or the motor driven equipment 4 Using the Rotary Encoder dial in a speed setting at the Set field and press the Rotary Encoder 5 Press the Run key illuminated green RUN LED turns red and the motor accelerates to the set speed at the default programmed rate The speed may be changed while running 6 Press the Stop Reset key to stop the motor Default Setting Changes To change a parameter setting using the EOI press the MON PRG key until the Program menu is displayed From the Program menu scroll to the desired parameter group and press the Rotary Encoder Repeat for sub menu items Once reaching the lowest level of a parameter
30. Assign a discrete input terminal to the Jog function see Table 5 on pg 162 2 Assign a discrete input terminal to the F Forward function and Reverse if required see Table 5 on pg 162 3 Provide a Forward and or Reverse command from the Control Terminal Strip 4 From the Jog Window use the Up Down arrow keys of the EOI to select Reverse or Forward Program gt Frequency Setting Parameters gt Jog Settings gt Enable Jog Window Press MON PRG to access the Jog Window 5 Place the system in the Remote mode Local Remote LED is off 6 Connect the assigned Jog terminal from step 1 to CC for the desired Jog duration 94 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F261 F273 Jog Stop Control Program gt Frequency Setting Parameters gt Jog Settings This parameter sets the stopping method used while operating in the Jog mode Settings Deceleration Stop Coast Stop DC Injection Braking Stop Direct Access Number F261 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Deceleration Stop Changeable During Run Yes Jump Frequency 1 Program gt Special Control Parameters gt Jump Frequencies In conjunction with parameter F271 this parameter establishes a user defined frequency range the Jump Frequency and a plus or minus value During acceleration the output frequency of the dr
31. F609 Parameter Type Check Box Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run No Low Current Trip Program Protection Parameters Low Current Settings This parameter Enables Disables the low current trip feature When enabled the drive will trip on a low current fault if the output current of the drive falls below the level defined at F611 and remains there for the time set at F612 Settings Disabled Enabled box checked Direct Access Number F610 Parameter Type Check Box Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run No Low Current Trip Threshold Program Protection Parameters Low Current Settings When the low current monitor is enabled this function sets the low current trip threshold The threshold value is entered as a percentage of the maximum rating of the drive Direct Access Number F611 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 100 0 Units 144 Low Current Trip Threshold Time Program gt Protection Parameters Low Current Settings When the low current monitor is enabled this function sets the time that the low current condition must exist to cause a trip Direct Access Number F612 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Units Seconds HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phon
32. Motor Constant 2 secondary resistance Program Motor Parameters Vector Motor Model This parameter is the measurement of the rotor resistance and is considered a Motor Constant unchanging This value is used in conjunction with other constants to tune the motor This setting motor tuning is required to use the Vector Control Automatic Torque Boost or Automatic Energy saving functions F403 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD dependent Direct Access Number Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 00 Maximum Open Units Q Motor Constant 3 exciting inductance Program Motor Parameters Vector Motor Model This parameter is used to input the excitation inductance for the motor This value is used in conjunction with other constants to tune the motor This setting motor tuning is required to use the Vector Control Automatic Torque Boost or Automatic Energy saving functions HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F404 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD dependent Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 00 Maximum 6500 0 Units pH 115 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F405 F414 Motor Constant 4 load inertia Direct Access Number F405 Program gt Motor Parameters Vector Motor Model Parameter Type Numerical Factory Defaul
33. Overtorque Parameters This parameter sets the torque threshold level that is used as a setpoint for overtorque tripping This setting is a percentage of the maximum rated torque of the drive Direct Access Number F616 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 150 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 00 Maximum 250 0 Units Overtorque Trip Alarm Level Negative Torque Program gt Protection Parameters Overtorque Parameters This parameter sets the torque threshold level that is used as a setpoint for overtorque tripping during regeneration This setting is a percentage of the maximum rated torque of the drive HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F617 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 150 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 00 Maximum 250 0 Units 145 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F618 F623 Overtorque Detection Time Program gt Protection Parameters Overtorque Parameters This parameter sets the amount of time that the overtorque condition may exceed the tripping threshold level set at F616 and F617 before a trip occurs Direct Access Number F618 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 50 Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 00 Maximum 100 0 Units Seconds Cooling Fan Control Program Protection P
34. Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Direct Access Number F306 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 600 0 Units Volts HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual F307 F311 Supply Voltage Compensation Program gt Protection Parameters Base Frequency Voltage This parameter Enables Disables the Voltage Compensation function This function provides an output waveform adjustment that compensates for changes in the input voltage Settings Box checked Enabled Box not checked Disabled F307 Parameter Type Check Box Direct Access Number Factory Default Enabled Changeable During Run No Dynamic Braking Resistance Program Protection Parameters Dynamic Braking not used This parameter is used to input the resistive value of the Dynamic Braking Resistor For additional information on selecting the proper resistance value for a given application contact Toshiba s Marketing Department Note Using a resistor value that is too low may result in system damage F308 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD dependent Direct Access Number Changeable During Run No Minimum 1 0 Maximum 1000 0 Units Q Dynamic Braking Resistance Capacity Program Protection Parameters Dynamic Braking n
35. Settings q Frequency Mode 2 Use VI II 0 to 10 volt DC analog input connected to VI or a 4 20 mA or 0 to 1 mA DC current connected to II cannot use both simultaneously Use RR 0 to 10 volt DC analog input connected to RR Use RX 10 to 10 volt DC analog input connected to RX Use Option Card RX2 10 to 10 volt DC analog input connected to RX2 Use LED Keypad Option The LED Keypad is unavailable at the time of this release Use Binary BCD Input Allows for discrete terminal input to control the ASD output Use Common Serial TTL To use the EOI for control requires that the LCD Port Connection be set to Common Serial TTL to use this feature Use RS232 RS485 To use the EOI for control requires that the LCD Port Connection be set to RS232 RS485 to use this feature Use Communication Card Routes the control and monitoring I O to CNU3 of the Control Board of the HX7 ASD Option Card connector Use Motorized Pot Simulation A discrete terminal may be configured to increase or decrease the speed of the motor by momentarily connecting the assigned terminal to CC See Table 6 on page 170 for further information on this feature Use Pulse Input Option Configures the system to receive pulse input See PG Speed Reference 1 on pg 97 for further information on this feature 28 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation ne
36. T2 V and T3 W must be connected to the motor that is to be controlled see Figure 14 on pg 15 As a minimum the installation of the ASD shall conform to Article 110 of the 2008 NEC the Occupational Safety and Health Administration requirements and to any other local and regional industry codes and standards See the W7 ASD Installation and Operation Manual for specifics of the 3 phase input output and the system grounding requirements HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual 7 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Input Control Signals and Monitoring The HX7 ASD can be controlled by several input types and combinations thereof as well as operate within a wide range of output frequency and voltage levels This section discusses the HX7 ASD control methods and supported I O functions The Terminal Board P N 48570 supports discrete and analog I O functions and is shown in Figure 2 on pg 11 Table 1 lists the names descriptions and the default settings of programmable terminals of the input and output terminals of the Terminal Board Note To use the input lines of the Terminal Board to provide Run commands the Command Mode setting must be set to Terminal Block Figure 14 on pg 15 shows the basic connection diagram for the HX7 ASD system Table 1 Terminal Board default terminal name assignments and functions
37. Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Excitation Starting Rate Program Special Control Parameters gt Special Parameters gt Excitation Starting Rate This parameter establishes the rate of increase in the excitation current from a zero output of the ASD 126 Direct Access Number F486 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 163 8 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 1 64 Maximum 327 6 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F487 F491 Compensation Coefficient for Iron Loss Direct Access Number F487 Program gt Special Control Parameters gt Special Parameters gt Parameter Type Numerical Compensation Coefficient for Iron Loss Factory Default 105 0 This parameter compensates for losses in the rotor to stator coupling of the Changeable During Run Yes excitation and torque current energy Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Voltage Compensation Coefficient for Dead Time Direct Access Number F488 Program gt Special Control Parameters gt Special Parameters gt Parameter Type Numerical Voltage Compensation Coefficient for Dead Time Factory Default 163 8 This parameter adjusts the degree of voltage compensation during dead time by Changeable During Run Yes increasing or decreasing the on time of the programmed PWM just prior to the Minimum 1 64 start of the
38. 119 Torque Control 38 Torque Current 30 Torque Limit Group 155 Torque Limit Mode 122 Torque Limit Mode Speed Dependent 123 Torque Limit Settings 38 Torque Reference 30 Torque Setting Parameters 37 Torque Speed Limiting 38 Trip History 42 176 Trip Monitor from ASD 42 Trip Record at Monitor Screen 176 Trip Save at Power Down Enable 142 Trip Settings 37 Trips 168 Trouble Shooting 168 TTL Master Output 158 Type Reset 33 47 Type form Error 175 U Phase OC 175 JC 171 Jnder Curr ent Trip 173 Jndervoltage Detection Time 147 ndervoltage Stall level 148 ndervoltage Trip 147 ndervoltage Ridethrough 37 p Key 17 pper Deviation Limits 109 pper Limit Frequency 21 49 pper Limit Frequency Adjustment 149 se Speed Mode 112 ser Notification codes 168 tility Parameters 33 Cacdcea g g g qac ccd g HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net V V Phase OC 175 V f Adjustment 43 V f Adjustment Coefficient 71 V f Five Point Setting 43 V f Group 154 V f Pattern 50 Vector Motor Model 41 Vector Motor Model Autotune Command 115 Vector Motor Model Slip Frequency Gain 115 Versions 33 VI 8 10 VIAT 31 VII Bias Adjust 123 VIII Gain Adjust 124 VI I Input Speed Control Setup 74 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual VI II Input To
39. 12 Same as 1 Pattern Characteristics see F570 Direct Access Number F581 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Time From Start Changeable During Run No Pattern 13 Characteristics Pattern Run Program gt Pattern Run Control Parameters Preset Speeds gt 13 Same as 1 Pattern Characteristics see F570 Direct Access Number F582 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Time From Start Changeable During Run No Pattern 14 Characteristics Pattern Run Program Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Preset Speeds gt 14 Same as 1 Pattern Characteristics see F570 Direct Access Number F583 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Time From Start Changeable During Run No Pattern 15 Characteristics Pattern Run Program Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Preset Speeds gt 15 Same as 1 Pattern Characteristics see F570 Direct Access Number F584 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Time From Start Changeable During Run No Pattern Run 1 Run Time Setting Program Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Preset Speeds gt 1 This parameter sets the run time value for the 1 Preset Speed mode when used as part of a Pattern Run Direct Access Number F585 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 5 Changeable During Run No Minimum 1 Maximum 8000 Units Seco
40. 13 input terminal may be used without the ASD Multicom option board Without the ASD Multicom option board the 13 terminal assignment information will be stored in volatile memory The terminal assignment information will be lost if the system is powered down or reset In addition the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This parameter sets the programmable terminal 13 to 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 5 on pg 162 60 Direct Access Number F123 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Unassigned Changeable During Run No HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F124 F126 Input Terminal 14 Assignment Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters Input Terminal Assignment gt 14 This parameter selects the functionality of the 14 input terminal Note The 14 input terminal may be used without the ASD Multicom option board Without the ASD Multicom option board the 14 terminal assignment information will be stored in volatile memory The terminal assignment information will be lost if the system is powered down or reset In addition the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This parameter sets the programmable terminal 14 to 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 5 on pg 162
41. 173 End Frequency 91 Enter Key 17 E Off 173 EOI Features 17 EOI Operation 18 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net EOI Setup Options 32 Equipment Inspection 3 Escape Key 17 Excitation Current 30 Excitation Starting Rate 126 Exciting Strengthening Coefficient 125 Extended Terminal Function 56 F F 8 9 F Input Terminal Assignment 57 F Input Terminal Delay 63 Fan Control 37 146 Fault 168 Faults 168 Feedback 1 Second 30 Feedback in Panel Mode 155 Feedback Instantaneous 30 Feedback Parameters 38 Feedback Settings 38 Feedback Settings Differential D Gain 109 Feedback Source 108 Feedback Source Delay Filter 108 FL Off Delay 67 FL On Delay 65 FL Output Terminal Assignment 62 FLA 8 10 FLA B and C switching relationship 10 Flash Error 173 FLB 8 10 FLC 8 10 FM 8 31 41 FM Terminal Adjustment 47 FM Terminal Assignment 47 Forward Speed Limit Input 118 Forward Speed Limit Level 119 FP 8 10 FP Terminal Adjustment 153 FP Terminal Setting 153 FP Terminal Settings 34 Frequency Control 42 Frequency Control Selections 28 Frequency Display Resolution 153 Frequency for Automatic High Speed Operation at Light Load 107 Frequency Limit at Position 111 Frequency Mode 1 46 Frequency Mode 2 32 76 Frequency Override Additive Inpu
42. 2 0 Sec 2 5 Sec 3 0 Sec 3 5 Sec 4 0 Sec 4 5 Sec 5 0 Sec slow F315 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default 1 0 Changeable During Run No Units Seconds HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F320 F324 Drooping Gain Program Feedback Parameters gt Drooping Control This parameter sets the effective 100 output torque level while operating in the Drooping Control mode This value is the upper torque limit of the motor being driven by a given ASD while operating in the Drooping Control mode Drooping Drooping Control also called Load Share is used to share the load among two or more mechanically coupled motors Unlike Stall which reduces the output frequency in order to limit the load once the load reaches a preset level Drooping can decrease or increase the V f setting of a motor to maintain a balance between the output torque levels of mechanically coupled motors Because of variances in gearboxes sheaves belts motors and since the speed of the motor is constrained by the mechanical system one motor may experience more load than its counterpart and may become overloaded Drooping Control allows the overloaded motor to slow down thus shedding load and encouraging a lightly loaded motor to pick up the slack The goal of Drooping Control is t
43. 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F593 F598 Pattern Run 9 Run Time Setting Program Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Preset Speeds gt 9 This parameter sets the run time value for the 9 Preset Speed mode when used as part of a Pattern Run Direct Access Number F593 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 5 Changeable During Run No Minimum 1 Maximum 8000 Units Seconds Pattern Run 10 Run Time Setting Program Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Preset Speeds gt 10 This parameter sets the run time value for the 10 Preset Speed mode when used as part of a Pattern Run Direct Access Number F594 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 5 Changeable During Run No Minimum 1 Maximum 8000 Units Seconds Pattern Run 11 Run Time Setting Program gt Pattern Run Control Parameters Preset Speeds gt 11 This parameter sets the run time value for the 11 Preset Speed mode when used as part of a Pattern Run Direct Access Number F595 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 5 Changeable During Run No Minimum 1 Maximum 8000 Units Seconds Pattern Run 12 Run Time Setting Program Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Preset Speeds gt 12 This parameter sets the run time value for the 12 Preset Speed mode when used as part of a Pattern Run Direct Ac
44. BCD Input For proper scaling of the binary or BCD input parameters F228 F231 must be configured BIN Reference Point 1 BIN Reference 1 frequency Bin Reference Point 2 and BIN Reference 2 frequency 56 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F108 F112 Motorized Pot Frequency at Power Down Program gt Frequency Setting Parameters gt Motorized Pot Settings When the Frequency Mode 1 Selection F004 setting is set to Use MOP Function Simulation this parameter determines the outcome of the Frequency Mode 1 setting at powerdown or stop Settings Erase Store If Erase is selected the ASD will not store the frequency setpoint and establishes a setpoint of 0 0 Hz when restarted If Store is selected the ASD will maintain the current frequency setpoint in memory while stopped during fault conditions or when power is removed This setpoint will be used as the initial frequency setpoint when the ASD is restarted A control terminal configured as MOP Frequency Clear will establish a frequency setpoint of 0 0 Hz regardless of the Motorized Pot Frequency at Power Down setting F108 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default Erase Changeable During Run No ON Input Terminal Assignment Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters Input Terminal Assig
45. Boost function is used to increase the low frequency torque for high inertia loads by increasing the output voltage at frequencies below 1 2 of the 2 Base Frequency setting F170 See parameter F016 Motor 1 Torque Boost for an explanation of torque boost This parameter is used only when the parameters for motor set 2 are configured and selected Motor set 2 may be selected by a properly configured input terminal Direct Access Number F172 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 30 0 Units Electronic Thermal Protection 2 Program gt Motor Parameters gt Motor Set 2 The Motor 2 Electronic Thermal Protection parameter specifies the motor overload current level for motor set 2 This value is entered as either a percentage of the full load rating of the ASD or as the FLA of the motor The unit of measurement for this parameter may be set to Amps V A or it may be set as a percentage of the ASD rating The name plated FLA of the motor may be entered directly when Amps is selected as the unit of measurement see F701 to change the display unit Electronic Thermal Protection settings 1 4 will be displayed in Amps if the EOI display units are set to V A rather than F173 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 0 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 10 0 Maximum
46. Direct Access Number F124 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Unassigned Changeable During Run No Input Terminal 15 Assignment Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters Input Terminal Assignment gt 15 This parameter selects the functionality of the 15 input terminal Note The 15 input terminal may be used without the ASD Multicom option board Without the ASD Multicom option board the 15 terminal assignment information will be stored in volatile memory The terminal assignment information will be lost if the system is powered down or reset In addition the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This parameter sets the programmable terminal 15 to 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 5 on pg 162 Direct Access Number F125 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Unassigned Changeable During Run No Input Terminal 16 Assignment Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters Input Terminal Assignment gt 16 This parameter selects the functionality of the 16 input terminal Note The 16 input terminal may be used without the ASD Multicom option board Without the ASD Multicom option board the 16 terminal assignment information will be stored in volatile memory The terminal assignment information will be lost if the system is powered down or reset In addition the input terminal must be specified as
47. During Run No Group 4 Speed 7 Program gt Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Speeds Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 Direct Access Number F567 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 15 Changeable During Run No Group 4 Speed 8 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Speeds Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F568 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Skip Changeable During Run No 137 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F570 F578 Pattern 1 Characteristics Pattern Run Program gt Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Preset Speeds gt 1 In conjunction with the setting of F585 this parameter is used to set the run time of Preset Speed 1 when used as part of a Pattern Run Settings Time From Start Time From Reach No Limit Until Next Step Direct Access Number F570 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Time From Start Changeable During Run No Pattern 2 Characteristics Pattern Run Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Preset Speeds gt 2 Same as 1 Pattern Characteristics see F570 Direct Access Number F571 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Time From Start Changeable During Run No Pattern 3 Characteristics Pattern
48. F331 F333 are met the Light Load High Speed function is enabled and this parameter determines the operating mode of the Light Load High Speed function Settings Disabled Reserved Automatic Enable Automatic Speed F341 Automatic Enable Preset Speed Preset IDp is OR ed w 1000gin Discrete Enable Automatic Speed F341 see item 60 of Table 5 on pg 162 Discrete Enable Preset Speed Preset IDp is OR ed w 1000gin see item 60 of Table 5 on pg 162 F330 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run No Minimum 30 0 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz 104 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F331 F335 Light Load High Speed Operation Switching Lower Limit Frequency Program gt Special Control Parameters Crane Hoist Settings gt Express Speed Settings Light Load High Speed Operation Switching Lower Limit Frequency This parameter sets an output frequency threshold that once surpassed allows the Light load High speed function to be used The Light Load High Speed function may be used if the frequency threshold F331 and the following conditions are met 1 Light Load High Speed Operation Enable is configured at F330 2 The output torque is less than the setting established in F335 when reachin
49. Input Terminal Delay Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters gt Input Terminal Delays gt R This parameter delays the response of the drive to any change in the R terminal input by the programmed value see waveforms at F140 The delay may be increased to provide additional electrical noise immunity or to prevent the ASD from responding to contact bounce or chatter Direct Access Number F141 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 8 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 2 0 Maximum 200 0 Units mS ST Input Terminal Delay Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters gt Input Terminal Delays gt ST This parameter delays the response of the drive to any change in the ST terminal input by the programmed value see waveforms at F140 The delay may be increased to provide additional electrical noise immunity or to prevent the ASD from responding to contact bounce or chatter Direct Access Number F142 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 8 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 2 0 Maximum 200 0 Units mS RES Input Terminal Delay Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters Input Terminal Delays gt RES This parameter delays the response of the drive to any change in the RES terminal input by the programmed value see waveforms at F140 The delay may be increased to provide additional electrical noise immunity or to prevent the ASD from respondi
50. Lower Limit F013 V f Pattern F015 Command Mode F001 Frequency Mode 1 F004 Standard Mode Selection Frequency Mode 2 F207 Reference Priority Selection F200 Mode 1 2 Switching Frequency F208 Accel 1 F009 Decel 1 F010 Accel Decel 1 Settings Accel Decel Pattern F502 Automatic Accel Decel Enable Disable F000 1 Base Frequency F014 1 Max Output Voltage F306 Motor Set 1 1 Torque Boost F016 1 Electronic Thermal Protection Level F600 STARTUP WIZARD See the section titled Startup Wizard Requirements on pg 39 CHANGED FROM nO l See the section titled Default Setting Changes on pg 38 N A DEFAULT DIRECT ACCESS See the section titled Direct Access Parameter Information on pg 53 Darker highlight Darker and press Enter EOI OPTION SETUPS Contrast adjustment elie j Lighter highlight Lighter and press Enter Command Local Remote Key Frequency Realtime Clock Setup Date and Time Setting Double Click Speed N A Arrow Speed Preferences Encoder Speed Encoder Action Overheat Alarm Alarm Popups Undervoltage Alarm 32 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Program Menu Navigation Parameter Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Number EOI OPTION SETUPS Over current Alarm ASD Overload Alarm Motor Overload Alarm Alarm Popups N A Timer Overtorque Alarm DBR Resistor Alar
51. Motor 2 Base Frequency setting is the frequency at which the output voltage of the ASD reaches its maximum setting The 2 Maximum Output Voltage is set at F171 This parameter is used only when the parameters for motor set 2 are configured and selected Motor set 2 may be selected by a properly configured input terminal For proper motor operation the Base Frequency should be set for the name plated frequency of the motor F170 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 60 0 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 25 0 Maximum 299 0 Units Hz Motor 2 Max Output Voltage Program gt Motor Parameters gt Motor Set 2 The Motor 2 Maximum Output Voltage is the Motor 2 output voltage at the Base Frequency F170 Regardless of the programmed value the output voltage cannot be higher than the input voltage The actual output voltage will be influenced by the input voltage of the ASD and the Supply Voltage Compensation setting F307 This parameter is used only when the parameters for motor set 2 are configured and selected Motor set 2 may be selected by a properly configured input terminal Direct Access Number F171 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 600 0 Units Volts Motor 2 Torque Boost Program gt Motor Parameters gt Motor Set 2 The Motor 2 Torque
52. Parameters Communication Reference Adjust This parameter enables the communications reference for scaling by selecting an input type See F811 F814 for further information on this setting Note Scaling the communications signal is not required for all applications Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled Off then On for the changes to take effect Settings Disabled Common Serial TTL RS232 RS485 Communication Card F810 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run Yes Communications Speed Reference 1 Program Communication Setting Parameters Communication Reference Adjust When enabled at F810 this parameter is used to allow the user to set the gain and bias of the speed control input to the drive when the speed control signal is received via the source selected at F810 Communications Input Speed Control Setup Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive control input via Communications e Set Communications Speed Reference 1 F811 the input signal that represents BIN Speed Frequency 1 e Set Communications Speed Frequency 1 F812 e Set Communications Speed Reference 2 F813 the input signal that represents BIN Speed Frequency 2 e Set Communications Speed Frequency 2 F814 Provide a Run command F and or R Once set as the input signal value changes
53. Pattern Run Control gt Preset Speeds gt 2 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 0010 and is identified as Preset Speed 2 The binary number is applied to S1 S4 of the Changeable During Run Yes Control Terminal Strip to output the Preset Speed see F018 for further Minimum Lower Limit F013 information on this parameter Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz 52 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F020 F100 Preset Speed 3 Program Pattern Run Control gt Preset Speeds gt 3 This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 0011 and is identified as Preset Speed 3 The binary number is applied to S1 S4 of the Control Terminal Strip to output the Preset Speed see F018 for further information on this parameter Direct Access Number F020 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum Lower Limit F013 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz Preset Speed 4 Program Pattern Run Control gt Preset Speeds gt 4 This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 0100 and is identified as Preset Speed 4 The binary number is applied to S1 S4 of the Control Terminal Strip to output the Preset Speed see F018 for further inform
54. Pot Clear Connecting this terminal to CC clears the last Motorized Pot frequency settings see F108 for further information on this setting HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual 163 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Table 5 Discrete Input Terminal Assignment Selections and Descriptions 47 Momentary Push Run When connected to CC this terminal setting starts the motor 48 Momentary Push Stop When connected to CC this terminal setting stops the motor 49 Forward Reverse This setting operates in conjunction with another terminal being set to the Run Stop 50 func tion When configured to Run Run Stop to CC the make or break of this connection to CC changes the direction of the motor 50 Run Stop This terminal enables the motor to run when connected to CC and disables the motor when the connec tion is broken 51 Line Power Bypass This function operates in conjunction with the Line Power Switching frequency setting F355 An enabled check box at Program Terminal Selection Parameters gt Line Power Switching At and this input terminal setting enables this function Once configured including this terminal connection to CC the frequency setting of Line Power Switching Hz establishes the speed at which the drive terminates its output and routes commercial power to the motor 52 Frequ
55. Preset Speeds etc Frequency Control F004 The Frequency Mode 1 or the Frequency Mode Standard Mode Settings 2 setting establishes the user selected source of the frequency control input for the ASD The signal Fraen Woe 7 source selected here is used for speed control unless the Reference Priority Selection parameter is Frequency Mode 2 configured to automatically switch this setting see Use VI II F200 or if the Override feature is enabled via Reference Priority Selection communications or via the Local mode operation Table 3 on page 27 shows the hierarchy of the frequency control sources managed by the Override function The level of the control item on the hierarchy is listed from left to right highest to lowest respectively As indicated in the table the Override setting may supersede the selection at F004 Placing the EOI in the Local mode selects either the RS232 RS485 or the Common Serial TTL as the Frequency Mode 1 control source Once in the Local mode the LCD Port Connection setting determines if the RS232 RS485 or the Common Serial TTL will be used for Frequency Mode 1 control Local mode operation may be superseded by frequency commands received via Communications Example With the EOI set to Local and the LCD Port Connection set to Common Serial TTL setting the Communication Card or RS232 RS485 control to Override will supersede the Common Serial TTL setting The remaining control sou
56. Request Cleared Changeable During Run Yes 161 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Table 5 Discrete Input Terminal Assignment Selections and Descriptions 1 F Enables Forward operation commands 2 R Enables Reverse operation commands 3 ST Enables the Forward and Reverse operation commands maybe disabled at F103 4 RES Resets the device and any incurred faults 5 S1 Preset Speed Command 1 is used as the LSB of the 4 bit nibble that is used to select a Preset Speed 6 S2 Preset Speed Command 2 is used as the second bit of the 4 bit nibble that is used to select a Preset Speed 7 S3 Preset Speed Command 3 is used as the third bit of the 4 bit nibble that is used to select a Preset Speed 8 S4 Preset Speed Command 4 is used as the MSB of the 4 bit nibble that is used to select a Preset Speed 9 Jog Jog is the term used to describe turning on the motor for small increments of time and is used when precise positioning of motor driven equipment is required This terminal activates a Jog for the duration of activation The Jog settings may be configured at F260 and F261 10 Emergency Off Terminates the output signal from the drive and may apply a brake The braking method may be selected at F603 11 DC Braking The drive outputs a DC current that is inje
57. Run Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Preset Speeds gt 3 Same as 1 Pattern Characteristics see F570 Direct Access Number F572 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Time From Start Changeable During Run No Pattern 4 Characteristics Pattern Run Program Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Preset Speeds gt 4 Same as 1 Pattern Characteristics see F570 Direct Access Number F573 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Time From Start Changeable During Run No Pattern 5 Characteristics Pattern Run Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Preset Speeds gt 5 Same as 1 Pattern Characteristics see F570 Direct Access Number F574 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Time From Start Changeable During Run No Pattern 6 Characteristics Pattern Run Program Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Preset Speeds gt 6 Same as 1 Pattern Characteristics see F570 Direct Access Number F575 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Time From Start Changeable During Run No Pattern 7 Characteristics Pattern Run Program gt Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Preset Speeds gt 7 Same as 1 Pattern Characteristics see F570 Direct Access Number F576 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Time From Start Changeable During Run No Pattern 8 C
58. Selection Parameters gt Input Special Functions Parameter Type Check Box Factory Default Disabled This parameter is used to allow the Jog and DC Injection Braking input signals to control the ASD when received via the Control Terminal Strip even though the system is in the Local mode Changeable During Run No With this parameter enabled a Jog command or a DC Injection Braking command received from the Control Terminal Strip will receive priority over commands from the EOI See F260 for further information on using the Jog function See F250 F252 for further information on DC Injection Braking Settings Enabled Box checked Disabled Extended Terminal Function Direct Access Number F107 Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters gt Input Special Functions Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default None The Extended Terminal Function is used with the optional ASD Multicom card only This parameter defines the format of the binary or BCD data when using the option card Changeable During Run No Settings None 12 Bit Binary 16 Bit Binary 3 Digit BCD 4 Digit BCD Reverse 12 Bit Binary Reverse 16 Bit Binary Reverse 3 Digit BCD Reverse 4 Digit BCD Selections using 16 bit binary or 4 digit BCD will require the configuration of terminals S1 S4 on the Control Terminal Strip as binary bits 0 3 F115 F118 The Frequency Mode 1 Selection F004 must be set to Use Binary
59. Setting F506 F009 Setting _____ Effective Acceleration Time S Pattern Acceleration Deceleration 1 4 Max Freq FH Freq Setting S pattern 2 acceleration and deceleration decreases the rate of change above the base Freq frequency Freq Hz Time Effective Acceleration Tine a sec S Pattern Acceleration Deceleration 2 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual 129 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F503 F507 Accel Decel Pattern 2 Program gt Special Control Parameters gt 1 4 Settings This parameter enables a user selected preprogrammed output profile that controls the acceleration and deceleration pattern for the 2 Accel Decel parameter Settings Linear S Pattern 1 S Pattern 2 Direct Access Number F503 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Linear Changeable During Run Yes Acc Dec Group No path available Direct Access Only While operating using the LED Keypad Option this parameter selects the accel decel profile to be used during a multiple accel decel profile configuration The accel decel setting for selections 1 4 may be found at F009 F500 F510 and F514 respectively Settings Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Note If using the LCD EOL press ESC from the Frequency Command screen to access this parameter Direct Access
60. Speed Frequency 1 and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of RR Speed Reference 1 while operating in the Speed Control mode Direct Access Number F211 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz RR Speed Reference 2 Program gt Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints gt RR This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RR input terminal when the RR terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode or the Torque Control mode See RR Speed Reference 1 for further information on this setting when used for Speed control or Torque control This parameter sets the RR input level that is associated with RR Speed Frequency 2 while operating in the Speed control mode or is associated with the RR Torque Reference Setpoint 2 while operating in the Torque control mode Direct Access Number F212 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 100 0 Units RR Speed Frequency 2 Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints RR This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RR input terminal when the RR terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode See RR Speed Reference 1 for further information on this se
61. This parameter sets RX Speed Reference 1 and is the input signal level that is associated with the setting of RX Torque Reference Setpoint 1 while operating in the Torque Control mode HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual F218 2 0 Direct Access Number F216 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 00 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 100 0 Maximum 100 0 Units Frequency Settings 100 0 je RX Input Signal e 100 FH j FH i Dutput Frequency Fei7 Feig 1 HZ e RX Speed Frequency 2 Hz Note The speed control response may be further trimmed by adjusting the Bias and Gain settings Torque Settings F220 1 CA e RX Torque Ref Setpoint 2 81 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F217 F220 RX Speed Frequency 1 Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints gt RX This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX input terminal when the RX terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode See RX Speed Reference 1 F216 for further information on this setting This parameter sets RX Speed Frequency 1 and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of RX Speed Ref
62. and F313 Settings Box checked Enabled Box not checked Disabled 98 Parameter Type Check Box Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run Yes HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F302 F303 Ridethrough Mode Program Protection Parameters Undervoltage Ridethrough This parameter determines the motor control response of the drive in the event of a momentary power outage Settings Off Ridethrough Stop Direct Access Number F302 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Off Changeable During Run Yes Number of Retries Program Protection Parameters Retry Restart After a trip has occurred this parameter sets the number of times that an automatic system restart is attempted for a qualified trip The trip conditions listed below will not initiate the automatic Retry Restart function U V W phase short circuit DBR Resistor Overcurrent Not used e Input Phase Loss Input Phase Failure e Output Phase Loss Output Phase Failure e Overcurrent During Acceleration Startup Overcurrent Earth Fault Ground Fault e EMG Emergency Off e EEPROM Data Fault EEPROM Fault e Flash Memory Gate Array RAM ROM Fault CPU Fault Communication Error e Option Fault e Output Current Protection Fault e Sink Source Setting Error
63. as this terminal is connected to CC the status of the F and R ter minals is ignored Use F260 to set the Jog Frequency and use F261 to select the Jog Stop Method 26 Forced Jog Reverse This setting initiates a Forced Reverse Jog when connected to CC The Forced Reverse Jog command provides a reverse run signal so long as this terminal is connected to CC the status of the F and R terminals is ignored Use F260 to set the Jog Frequency and use F261 to select the Jog Stop Method 27 Binary Bit 0 Bit 0 7 may be set up as a speed torque control register Speed torque settings may be applied to this group of terminals in binary form The required number of input terminals should be set to the respective binary bit settings 0 MSB The Frequency Mode setting must be set to Use Binary BCD input The gain and bias of the binary input may be set from the following path Program Frequency Setting Parameters gt Speed Reference Setpoints gt BIN see F228 28 Binary Bit 1 See selection 27 above 29 Binary Bit 2 See selection 27 above 30 Binary Bit 3 See selection 27 above 31 Binary Bit 4 See selection 27 above 32 Binary Bit 5 See selection 27 above 33 Binary Bit 6 See selection 27 above 34 Binary Bit 7 See selection 27 above 35 Forced Stop Activating this terminal terminates the Run command regardless of the Command M
64. bit error output 14 Overtorque Alarm 45 Error Code Output 6 6 bit error output 15 Braking Resistor Overload Pre alarm 46 Designated Data Output 1 7 bit transmission output 16 In Emergency Off 47 Designated Data Output 2 7 bit transmission output 17 Retrying 48 Designated Data Output 3 7 bit transmission output 18 Pattern Operation Switching Out 49 Designated Data Output 4 7 bit transmission output 19 PID Deviation Limit 50 Designated Data Output 5 7 bit transmission output 20 Start Stop 51 Designated Data Output 6 7 bit transmission output 21 Serious Fault OCA OCL EF Lost Phase Short 52 Designated Data Output 7 7 bit transmission output Circuit or Abnormal Output 22 Light Fault OL OC1 2 3 OP 53 Light Load Detection Signal 23 Bypass Output 1 54 Heavy Load Detection Signal 24 Bypass Output 2 55 Positive Torque Limit 25 Fan On Off 56 Negative Torque Limit 26 Jogging 57 External Rush Suppression Relay Output 27 Control Terminal Strip Operation Command Mode 58 Over Travel 28 Total operation hours Alarm 59 Positioning Completion 29 Abnormal Communication Alarm external cause 60 Earth Fault Alarm 30 Forward Reverse Operation 61 Low Output Disable Alarm HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual 167 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Alarms Trips and Troubleshooting Alarms and Trips This section lists the available user notification codes of the EOI disp
65. ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net The Changed From Default feature allows the user to view or change the parameters that are different from the default or the post reset settings Once the Changed From Default screen is displayed the system scrolls through all of the system parameters and halts once reaching a changed parameter The Rotary Encoder may be clicked once clockwise to continue scrolling forward or clicked once counterclockwise to begin scrolling in reverse With each click of the Rotary Encoder from a stop the system scrolls through the parameters and stops at the next parameter that has been changed Pressing the Rotary Encoder while a changed parameter is displayed accesses the settings of the changed parameter for viewing or changing Pressing ESC while the system is performing a Changed From Default search terminates the search Pressing ESC when done searching or halted at a changed parameter returns the system to the Program menu Parameter settings may also be changed via Communications See the 7 Series Serial Communications User Manual P N 53840 for further information on using communications to change parameter settings The 7 Series Serial Communications Manual may be acquired from the website at Drives gt G7 LV Severe Duty Industrial gt Manuals or from your Toshiba Sales Representative 20 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomati
66. frequency that is associated with the setting of PG Speed Reference 2 while operating in the Speed Control mode F237 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 80 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum Max Freq F011 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz Startup Frequency Program Special Control Parameters Frequency Control The output of the drive will remain at 0 0 Hz until the programmed speed value exceeds this setting during startup Once exceeded during startup the output frequency of the drive will accelerate to the programmed setting Output frequencies below the Startup Frequency will not be output from the drive during startup However once reaching the Startup Frequency speed values below the Startup Frequency may be output from the drive Direct Access Number F240 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 10 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 10 0 Units Hz HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F241 F244 Run Frequency Direct Access Number F241 Program gt Special Control Parameters gt Frequency Control Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 ane parameter establishes a center frequency Run Frequency of a frequency Changeable D ring Run Yes Parameter F242 provides a pl
67. group scroll to the parameter to be changed and press the Rotary Encoder The parameter takes on the reverse video format dark background light text Use the Rotary Encoder to scroll to the new value or setting Press the ESC key to exit without saving the parameter change while still in the reverse video mode or press the Rotary Encoder to accept and save the change For a complete listing of the Program menu items see the section titled Program Mode on pg 40 The menu items are mapped for convenience The Direct Access Numbers are listed where applicable The Direct Access numbers are also listed chronologically in the section titled Direct Access Parameter Information on pg 53 The default settings may also be changed by entering the Parameter Number of the setting to be changed at the Direct Access menu Program gt Direct Access gt Applicable Parameter Number A listing of all parameters that have been changed from the default setting may be viewed sequentially by accessing the Changed From Default screen Program gt Changed From Default Note Parameter F012 was changed to create the example shown in Figure 16 Figure 16 Changed From Default screen Changed From Default Fundamentals Startup Wizard 0012 UL FRQ 176F Goto Use arrows to view Changed From Default Direct Access EOI Option Setups HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual 19 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www
68. info ctiautomation net F202 F205 VI II Speed Frequency 1 Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints gt VI II This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the VI II input terminal when the VI II terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode See VI II Speed Reference 1 F201 for further information on this setting This parameter sets VI II Speed Frequency 1 and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of VI II Speed Reference 1 while operating in the Speed Control mode Direct Access Number F202 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz VI Il Speed Reference 2 Program gt Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints gt VIII This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the VI II input terminal when the VI II terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode or the Torque Control mode See VI II Speed Reference 1 for further information on this setting when used for Speed control or Torque control This parameter sets the VI II input level that is associated with VI II Speed Frequency 2 while operating in the Speed control mode or is associated with the VI I Torque Reference Setpoint 2 while operating in the Torque control mode F203 Parameter Type Numerical Fac
69. input may be varied as required for the application The gain and bias of this terminal may be adjusted for application specific suitability see F210 F215 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual 9 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net RX The RR terminal accepts a 10 VDC input signal and may be programmed to control the speed or torque of the motor This input terminal setting may be fixed or the input may be varied as required for the application The gain and bias of this terminal may be adjusted for application specific suitability see F216 F221 VI The Frequency Mode 2 function is assigned to this terminal The VI terminal accepts a 0 10 VDC input signal and may be programmed to control the speed or torque of the motor This input terminal setting may be fixed or the input may be varied as required for the application and may not be used when using the II input The gain and bias of this terminal may be adjusted for application specific suitability see F201 F206 Ill The Frequency Mode 2 function is assigned to this terminal The II terminal accepts a 4 20 mA input signal and may be programmed to control the speed or torque of the motor This input terminal setting may be fixed or the input may be varied as required for the application and may not be used when using the VI input The gain and bias of this terminal may be adjusted for application s
70. is used as the control input while operating in the Torque Changeable During Run Yes Control mode Minimum 250 00 This is accomplished by establishing an associated V f output pattern for a Maximum 250 00 given RX2 input level Units See RX2 Speed Reference 1 for further information on this setting This parameter sets RX2 Torque Reference Setpoint 2 and is the output torque value that is associated with setting of RX2 Speed Reference 2 while operating in the Torque control mode 86 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F228 F228 BIN Speed Reference 1 Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints gt BIN This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the binary input when the discrete input terminals are used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode or the Torque Control mode BIN Input Control Setup Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive control input at the binary input terminals e Program gt Fundamental Parameters gt Standard Mode Selection gt Frequency Mode 1 gt Use Binary BCD Input e Program gt Fundamental Parameters gt Standard Mode Selection gt Command Mode gt Use Control Terminal Strip e Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters gt Input Terminals select and set the desired discrete inpu
71. place any objects inside of the HX7 ASD e If the HX7 ASD should emit smoke or an unusual odor or sound turn the power off immediately e The heat sink and other components may become extremely hot to the touch Allow the unit to cool before coming in contact with these items e Remove power from the HX7 ASD during extended periods of non use e The system should be inspected periodically for damaged or improperly functioning parts cleanliness and to ensure that the connectors are tightened securely Service Life Information Part Name Service Life Remarks Large Capacity Electrolytic When not used for long periods 5 Years Capacitor charge semi annually Cooling Fan 26 000 Hours CN Connectors 100 Connects Disconnects On board Relays 500 000 Actuations 6 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net I O and Control The HX7 Adjustable Speed Drive may be set up initially by performing a few simple configuration settings To operate properly the ASD must be securely mounted and connected to a power source 3 phase AC input at the L1 R L2 S and L3 T terminals The control terminals of the ASD may be used by connecting the terminals of the Terminal Board to the proper sensors or signal input sources see the section titled Input Control Signals and Monitoring on pg 8 The output terminals of the ASD T1 U
72. the information contained within this manual This manual is copyrighted No part of this manual may be photocopied or reproduced in any form without the prior written consent of Toshiba International Corporation Copyright 2008 Toshiba International Corporation TOSHIBA is a registered trademark of the Toshiba Corporation All other product or trade references appearing in this manual are registered trademarks of their respective owners Reliability in motion is a registered trademark of the Toshiba Corporation All rights reserved Printed in the U S A Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Table of Contents General Safety Information sccsssscsccsscccsssscscecsescessccesscsssccesescesessesceesesssccssssssseees 1 Safety Alert Symbols ssccsgcsciecscssgesnsscebspeatavsenspoeuesbecesensteepseuontenspeuceea doe E EREET EENE 1 SiG tial Words cees er A E EAE E 1 Special Symbol six isorosi esiin iren EE EEKE EEEE EE ER 2 Equipment Warning Labels cs sssscsssessseesvecssseessscessccesneessassssessnsesnsavsoesstseseeees 2 Qualified Personne lisasin ecee nso eeentae ens ens a nee 2 Equipment INS peCHOnls siccstesscsdtsstsceasucstetivei csuasusesasessfesscoaxensnsaniesrrstenaisdeusststeedsendebane 3 Handling and Storage 2 s cs ccciccscesscescc
73. the output frequency of the drive will vary in accordance with the above settings This parameter sets the Communications Speed Reference 1 input value that represents Communications Speed Frequency 1 This value is entered as 0 to 100 of the Communications Speed Reference 1 input value range Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled Off then On for the changes to take effect HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual F811 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 100 0 Units PRIS See 2 D 0 0 Hz e FH Dutput Frequency F812 F814 1 Hz gt Comm Speed Freq 2 Hz 159 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 160 Program Communication Setting Parameters Communication Settings This parameter sets the RS232 RS485 baud rate Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled Off then On for the changes to take effect Settings 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 F812 F820 Communications Speed Frequency 1 Direct Access Number F812 Program Communication Setting Parameters Communication Parameter Type Numerical Reference Adjust Factory Default 0 00 This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the Communications Changea
74. this parameter HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F520 Parameter Type Check Box Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run No 133 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F521 F535 Pattern Run Mode Restart Command Program gt Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Pattern Run This parameter sets the start condition of subsequent Pattern Runs after the initial Pattern Run has been terminated or has completed its programming Settings Reset Continue Direct Access Number F521 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run No Group 1 Speed Repeat Factor Program Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Speeds This parameter sets the number of times that the pattern defined in Group 1 will be run F530 Parameter Type Numerical Direct Access Number Factory Default 1 Changeable During Run No Minimum 1 Maximum Infinite Group 1 Speed 1 Pattern Run Program Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Speeds Up to four groups of Preset Speeds may be setup and run from this screen The Preset Speed numbers 1 15 may be entered into the Speed field to be run for the number of times entered into the Repeat field 0 254 or forever by selecting Infinite Running multiple Preset Speeds as a group is called a Patte
75. to the device that is connected to the output terminals In addition the output terminals must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed Direct Access Number F131 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default RCH Acc Dec Complete Changeable During Run No FL Output Terminal Assignment Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters gt Output Terminal Assignment gt FL This parameter sets the functionality of the FL output terminals to 1 of the 62 possible functions that are listed in Table 7 on pg 167 The on and off delay times of the FL terminals may be adjusted to provide more response time to the device that is connected to the output terminals In addition the output terminals must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed ELB FLC ELA De energized C to B Direct Access Number F132 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Fault All Changeable During Run No Output 4 Terminal Assignment Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters gt Output Terminal Assignment gt 4 This parameter sets the functionality of the OUT4 terminals to 1 of the 62 possible functions that are listed in Table 7 on pg 167 The on and off delay times of the OUT4 terminals may be adjusted to provide more response time to the device that is connected to the output terminals In addition the output terminals must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed
76. 0 Should the count down timer expire before the brake releases or before the Braking Answer is returned fault E 11will occur Otherwise the brake releases the motor and normal motor operations resume The Braking Release function is primarily used at startup but may be used when the brake is applied while the motor is running 164 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Table 5 Discrete Input Terminal Assignment Selections and Descriptions 65 System Consistent Sequence BA braking answer This setting is required when the Braking Release 64 func tion is used The function of this input terminal is to receive the returned the status of the braking system The returned status is either Released or Not Released If Released is returned within the time setting of F630 normal system function resumes If Not Released is returned or if the F630 time setting times out before either signal is returned then fault E 11 occurs The returned signal may also be used to notify the user or control a dependent subsystem 66 System Consistent Sequence BT braking test TBD 67 Output Frequency Hold TBD 68 MUV Disable TBD HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual 165 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 166 The ma
77. 0 The execution of grouped Preset Speeds in this manner is called a Pattern Run Skip may be selected to ignore a Speed field Pattern Run Setup 1 Configure an unused discrete input terminal for Pattern 1 2 3 or 4 This terminal will initiate the selected Pattern Run The input terminal settings may be configured via Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters gt Input Terminals see Table 5 on pg 162 for available input terminal settings 2 Enable the Pattern Run mode of operation via Program gt Pattern Run Control Parameters Pattern Run gt Enable Disable check box 3 Configure the Preset Speeds that are to be used as the Group Speed set of frequencies via Program gt Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Preset Speeds e g Preset Speed 1 on pg 52 4 Configure the Group Speeds by associating the Preset Speeds that are to be enabled and grouped from step 3 as Group Speed 1 2 3 or 4 via Program gt Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Speeds Set the Repeat field to the number of times that the selected group is to be run Set unused speed settings to Skip 5 From the Remote mode LocallRemote LED is off initiate a Run command e g F and or R terminal On 6 Connect the input terminal that was configured in step 1 to CC and the Pattern Run will start and continue as programmed Open the connection to stop the Pattern Run before its conclusion See F018 on pg 52 for further information on
78. 0 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 0 Maximum 299 Units Hz Custom V f Five Point Setting 3 Voltage Program gt Special Control Parameters gt V f Five Point Setting The Custom V f Five Point Setting 3 Voltage establishes the percentage of the output voltage that is to be associated with the frequency setting of F194 Custom V f Five Point Setting 3 Frequency See F190 for additional information on custom V f curves Direct Access Number F195 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 0 Maximum 100 0 Units Custom V f Five Point Setting 4 Frequency Program gt Special Control Parameters gt V f Five Point Setting The Custom V f Five Point Setting 4 Frequency sets the frequency to be associated with parameter F197 Custom V f Five Point Setting 4 Voltage See F190 for additional information on custom V f curves Direct Access Number F196 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 0 Maximum 299 Units Hz Custom V f Five Point Setting 4 Voltage Program gt Special Control Parameters gt V f Five Point Setting The Custom V f Five Point Setting 4 Voltage establishes the percentage of the output voltage that is to be associated with the frequency setting of F196 Custom V f Five Point Setting 4 Frequency See F190 for additional information on
79. 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 120 0 Units Hz DC Injection Braking Current Program gt Protection Parameters DC Braking This parameter sets the percentage of the rated current of the drive that will be used for DC Injection braking A larger load will require a higher setting Direct Access Number F251 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 50 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 100 0 Units DC Injection Braking Time Program Protection Parameters DC Braking This parameter is used to set the on time duration of the DC Injection Braking Direct Access Number F252 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 1 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 10 00 Units Seconds Motor Shaft Fixing Control Program Protection Parameters DC Braking This parameter determines if DC Injection braking is to be used during a change in the direction of the motor Settings Box checked Enabled Box not checked Disabled F253 Parameter Type Check Box Direct Access Number Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run Yes HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F254 F255 Motor Shaft Stationary Control Program gt Protection Parameters gt DC Braking
80. 011 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 80 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 30 0 Maximum 299 0 Units Hz Upper Limit Frequency Program gt Fundamental Parameters gt Frequency Settings This parameter sets the highest frequency that the ASD will accept as a frequency command or frequency setpoint The ASD may output frequencies higher than the Upper Limit Frequency but lower than the Maximum Frequency when operating in the PID Control mode Torque Control mode or the Vector Control modes sensorless or feedback Note This setting may not be higher than the Maximum Frequency FOIL setting Direct Access Number F012 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 80 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz Lower Limit Frequency Program gt Fundamental Parameters gt Frequency Settings This parameter sets the lowest frequency that the ASD will accept as a frequency command or frequency setpoint The ASD will output frequencies lower than the Lower Limit Frequency when accelerating to the lower limit or decelerating to a stop Frequencies below the Lower Limit may also be output when operating in the PID Control mode Torque Control mode or the Vector Control modes sensorless or feedback F013 Parameter Type Numerical Direct Access Number Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum
81. 2 Analog Filter 35 Analog Input Filter 77 Analog Input Functions 34 Analog 41 Analog 2 41 Arm Short Check 37 ASD Load 31 ASD Number 157 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual ASD Overload 30 ASD NANOCOM 12 ASD side Switching Wait Time 107 At Frequency Powerline Switching 107 At trip Recorded Parameters 176 Automatic Accel Decel 1 45 Automatic Torque Boost 45 Autotuning Err 172 B Base Frequency Volts 37 Bias and Gain 74 78 81 84 BIN Input Control Setup 87 BIN Speed Control Setup 87 BIN Speed Frequency 1 88 BIN Speed Frequency 2 88 BIN Speed Reference 1 87 BIN Speed Reference 2 88 BIN Torque Control Setup 87 BIN Torque Reference Setpoint 1 88 BIN Torque Reference Setpoint 2 89 Brake Fault Internal Timer 148 Brake Fault Timer 37 Break Make Start 98 Bus Voltage 30 C Carrier Frequency 42 98 CC 8 Changed from Default 32 Changed From Default screen 20 Charge LED 6 Clearing a Trip 176 CM1 169 CM2 169 CN7 Pinout 13 CNU1 1A and CNU2 2A Pinout 14 CNU3 Pinout 13 Comm Error 172 Command Control Selections 27 Command Mode Selection 46 Command Source 23 Commercial Power Switching Frequency Hold Time 108 Commercial Power Wait Time 108 Common Serial TTL 12 Communication Baud Rate logic 157 177 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Communication Error
82. 2 OUT4 Off Delay 67 OUT4 On Delay 65 OUTS Off Delay 67 OUTS On Delay 66 OUT6 Off Delay 67 OUT6 On Delay 66 OUT7 Off Delay 67 OUT7 On Delay 66 Output 4 Terminal Assignment 62 Output 5 Terminal Assignment 63 Output 6 Terminal Assignment 63 Output 7 Terminal Assignment 63 Output Current 30 output disconnect 5 Output Phase Loss Detection 143 Output Power 31 Output Terminal Assignments 167 Output Terminal Delays 35 Output Terminal Functions 34 Output terminal selections 166 Output Terminals 30 Output Voltage 30 Over Exciting Cooperation 126 Overcurrent Acc 174 Overcurrent Dec 174 Overcurrent Run 174 Overcurrent Stall Level 142 Overheat 174 Overload 37 Override Control 39 Overspeed Detection Frequency Range 146 Overtorque 175 Overtorque Detection Time 146 Overtorque Settings 37 Overtorque Trip 145 Overtorque Trip Alarm Level Negative Torque 145 181 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Overtorque Trip Alarm Level Positive Torque 145 Overvolt Accel 175 Overvolt Decel 175 Overvolt Run 175 Over voltage Stall 100 Overvoltage Stall Level 147 Overvoltage Stall Level fast 147 P P24 8 10 PA 100 Panel Menu 29 Parity 157 Pattern 1 Characteristics Pattern Run 138 Pattern 10 Characteristics Pattern Run 139 Pattern 11 Characteristics Pattern Run 139 Pattern 12 Chara
83. 2 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 10 Changeable During Run No Group 2 Speed 3 Program gt Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Speeds Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 Direct Access Number F543 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 11 Changeable During Run No Group 2 Speed 4 Program gt Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Speeds Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 Direct Access Number F544 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 12 Changeable During Run No Group 2 Speed 5 Program gt Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Speeds Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 Direct Access Number F545 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 13 Changeable During Run No Group 2 Speed 6 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Speeds Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F546 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 14 Changeable During Run No 135 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F547 Group 2 Speed 7 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Speeds Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 Direct Access Number F547 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 15 Changeable During Run No Group 2
84. 2 F122 13 F123 14 F124 15 F125 16 F126 ON F110 Out 1 F130 Out 2 F131 Output Terminal i date Functions a 3 5 F134 6 F135 7 F136 Acc Dec Base Frequency Adjustment F650 Upper limit Frequency Adjustment F651 Analog Input Functions Acceleration Time Adjustment F652 Deceleration Time Adjustment F653 Torque Boost Adjustment F654 Low Speed Signal Output Frequency F100 Reach Settings Speed Reach Setting Frequency F101 Speed Reach Setting Frequency Range F102 i 7 FP Terminal Meter Selection F676 FP Terminal Settings i FP Terminal Meter Adjustment F677 ST Signal Selection F103 F R Priority Selection w both on F105 Input Special Functions Input Terminal Priority F106 Extended Terminal Function F107 Line Power Switching Lacan et S Watene Om Arip F354 34 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Program Menu Navigation Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Paremetet Number TERMINAL SELECTION Sn Enable Disable and F355 PARAMETERS 7 ASD Output Switching Wait Time F356 Line Power Switching Commercial Input Power Wait Time F357 Commercial Power Switching Frequency F358 Hold Time i F F140 R F141 ST F142 Input Terminal Delays RES F143 S1 S4 F144 S5 S16 F145 Out1 On Delay
85. 20 PID Value 28 Output Power 5 Output Current 13 Post Compensation Frequency 21 Motor Overload 29 Peak Current 6 Output Voltage 14 Feedback inst 22 ASD Overload 30 Peak Voltage 7 Direction 15 Feedback 1 sec 23 DBR Overload 31 PG Speed 8 Frequency Reference 16 Torque 24 Motor Load 32 PG Position Trip Record at Monitor Screen The Monitor screen records and displays the trip name of up to four trips and catalogs each trip as Past Trip 1 Past Trip 2 Past Trip 3 and Past Trip 4 Once reset Clear Trip the trip records are erased If no trips have occurred since the last reset No Error is displayed for each trip record Note An improper ASD setup may cause some trips reset the ASD to the factory default settings before pursuing a systemic malfunction Program gt Utilities gt Type Resets gt Restore Factory Defaults The at trip frequency of the last incurred trip may be viewed at the Monitor screen see pg 38 The Monitor screen at trip record is erased when the ASD is reset The current output frequency is displayed when there are no active trips Clearing a Trip Once the cause of the trip has been corrected performing a Reset re enables the ASD for normal operation clears the fault screen The fault screen may also be cleared using either of the following methods e Cycling power trip info may be saved via parameter F602 if desired e Pressing the Stop
86. 41 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Program Menu Navigation Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Paremetet Number Monitor SETUP Trip History Trip History Records N A Most Recent N A Second Most Recent N A Trip Monitor From ASD Third Most Recent N A Fourth Most Recent N A Scrolling Monitor Select Scrolling Monitor Configuration Selection N A SPECIAL CONTROL Start Frequency F240 End Frequency F243 PARAMETERS Frequency Control Run Frequency F241 Run Frequency Hysteresis F242 Jump Frequency Bandwidth Settings F271 Jump Frequencies i Jump Frequency Processing Selection F276 Carrier Frequency PWM Carrier Frequency Setting F300 Accel Decel Pattern 1 Configuration F009 Accel Decel 1 4 Accel Decel Pattern 2 Configuration F500 Settings Accel Decel Pattern 3 Configuration F510 Accel Decel Pattern 4 Configuration F514 S Pattern Lower Limit Adjustment F506 S Pattern Upper Limit Adjustment F507 Accel Decel Time Lower Limit F508 Accel Decel Special Accel Decel Switching Frequency 1 F505 Accel Decel Switching Frequency 2 F513 Accel Decel Switching Frequency 3 ES Accel Decel Display Resolution F704 High Speed Operation at Light Load F330 Light load High speed Operation Switching Goss F331 Lower Limit Frequency Light load High speed Oper
87. 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F018 F019 Preset Speed 1 Direct Access Number F018 Program gt Pattern Run Control gt Preset Speeds gt 1 Parameter Type Numerical Up to 15 output frequency values that fall within the Lower Limit and the Factory Default 0 0 Upper Limit range may be programmed into the drive and output as a Preset Changeable During Run Yes Speed This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 0001 and as Sdi M L Limit F013 is identified as Preset Speed 1 The binary number is applied to S1 S4 of the acai ower Limit Control Terminal Strip to output the Preset Speed Maximum Upper Limit F012 Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Preset Speed Units Hz control input at the S1 S4 terminals 1 Program Fundamental Parameters gt Standard Mode Selection gt Use Control Terminal Strip Freset Speed Truth Table S4 S1 2 Program Terminal Selection Parameters gt Input Terminals gt Preset 7 S3 S2 g Output S1 set to Preset Speed Command 1 LSB of 4 bit count Repeat T 0 OT OT 1 TOTS for S2 S4 MSB of 4 bit count as Preset Speed Command 2 4 gt 0 0 1 0 F019 respectively all Normally Open 3 0 0 I I F020 Note The default setting of S4 is EOFF but this terminal may be re f p l 4 4 ROPI assigned as the MSB
88. 5 0 1 0 1 F022 6 0 1 1 0 F023 3 Program gt Frequency Setting Parameters gt Preset Speeds gt 1 7 0 1 1 1 F024 press Enter twice and set an output frequency as Preset Speed 1 8 1 ommon F287 repeat for Preset Speeds 2 15 as required 9 1 0 0 1 F288 10 1 0 1 0 F289 4 Program gt Frequency Setting Parameters gt Preset Speed Mode T i 5 i 7 ai Use Speed Modes Enable Disable 12 1 1 0 0 F291 When Enabled the direction accel decel and torque settings of the 13 1 1 0 1 F292 Preset Speed being run are used 14 1 1 1 0 F293 When Disabled only the speed setting of the Preset Speed being run is 15 1 1 1 1 F294 used Note 1 Terminal connected to CC 5 Place the system in the Remote mode LocallRemote LED Off 6 Provide a Run command connect F and or R to CC Connect S1 to CC to run Preset Speed 1 S1 to CC 0001 binary With S1 S4 configured to output Preset Speeds F115 F118 0001 1111 may be applied to S1 S4 of the Control Terminal Strip to run the associated Preset Speed If bidirectional operation is required F and R must be connected to CC and Use Speed Modes must be enabled at F380 With S1 being the least significant bit of a binary count the S1 S4 settings will produce the programmed speed settings as indicated in the Preset Speed Truth Table to the right Preset Speeds are also used in the Pattern Run mode Preset Speed 2 Direct Access Number F019 Program
89. Acceleration Time 1 F009 and Deceleration Time 1 F010 Settings 0 Manual 1 Automatic ACC DEC 2 Automatic ACC Only Note The motor and the load must be connected prior to selecting Automatic Accel Decel Automatic Torque Boost Direct Access Number F001 Program Fundamental gt Motor Set 1 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled This parameter allows the ASD to adjust the output torque in accordance with the applied load automatically When enabled Autotuning is performed the motor should be connected before performing an Autotune Changeable During Run No Settings 0 Disabled 1 Automatic Torque Boost Autotuning 2 Sensorless Vector Control Autotuning HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual 45 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F003 F004 Command Mode Selection Program gt Fundamental Parameters gt Standard Mode Selection gt Command Mode The Command Mode Selection establishes the source of the command input for the ASD Command inputs include Run Stop Forward etc The Override feature may supersede the Command Mode Selection setting see Command Mode and Frequency Mode Control on pg 32 Settings 0 Terminal Block 1 Not Used 2 EOI Keypad 3 RS232 RS485 4 Communication Option Board F003 Parameter Type Selection List Direct A
90. Changeable During Run Yes Minimum Max Freq F011 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz RX2 Speed Reference 2 Program gt Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints gt RX2 This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX2 input terminal when the RX2 terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode or the Torque Control mode See RX2 Speed Reference 1 for further information on this setting when used for Speed control or Torque control This parameter sets the RX2 input level that is associated with RX2 Speed Frequency 2 while operating in the Speed control mode or is associated with the RX2 Torque Reference Setpoint 2 while operating in the Torque control mode Direct Access Number F224 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 100 0 Maximum 100 0 Units RX2 Speed Frequency 2 Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints gt RX2 This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX2 input terminal when the RX2 terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode See RX2 Speed Reference 1 for further information on this setting when used for Speed control This parameter sets RX2 Speed Frequency 2 and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of RX2 Speed Reference 2 while operating in the Speed Cont
91. D Programming and Operation Manual 109 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F368 F371 PG Input Phases Program gt Feedback Parameters gt PG Settings This parameter determines the type of information that is supplied by the phase encoder Settings 1 Speed 2 Speed and Direction F368 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default 2 Changeable During Run No Minimum 1 Maximum 2 Units Phase Count PG Disconnect Detection Program Feedback Parameters gt PG Settings This parameter Enables Disables the system s monitoring of the PG connection status when using encoders with line driver outputs Note The ASD Multicom J option board is required to use this feature Settings Disabled Enabled F369 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run No Electronic Gear Setting Program Feedback Parameters gt PG Settings This parameter sets the number of pulses per revolution when using a shaft mounted encoder and the PG Option Board for closed loop speed control Direct Access Number F370 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 1000 Changeable During Run No Minimum 100 Maximum 4000 110 Position Loop Gain Program gt Feedback Parameters gt PG Settings
92. D is improperly matched to the application The load is obstructed Overvolt Accel Motor running during restart Deceleration time is too short DBR value is too high DBR required DBR setup required Overvolt Decel Stall protection is disabled 3 phase input voltage is out of specification Input reactance required Overvolt Run Load fluctuations 3 Phase input voltage out of specification Positional Err Operating in the Position Control mode and the resulting position exceeds the limits of the Position Control setting RAM Err ROM Err Internal RAM malfunction Internal ROM malfunction Sink Source Error Improperly positioned Sink Source jumper on the control board or on an option device Sink Source configuration of an option device is incorrect Type form Error e Firmware information typeform loaded into the Gate Driver board is inconsistent with the device in which the firmware is being used e The Gate Driver board has been replaced The Gate Driver board is defective U Phase OC e Low impedance at the U lead of the ASD output V Phase OC e Low impedance at the V lead of the ASD output W Phase OC e Low impedance at the W lead of the ASD output Note The event that caused the Trip s must be corrected or must decrease to less than the threshold value required to cause the trip to allow for a Reset to be recognized In the event of multiple active trips th
93. DO NOT allow personnel near rotating machinery Warning signs to this effect shall be posted at or near the machinery DO NOT allow personnel near electrical conductors Human contact with electrical conductors can be fatal Warning signs to this effect shall be posted at or near the hazard DO NOT attempt to configure the system to use the Dynamic Braking function This system is not equipped to support the use of the Dynamic Braking function Attempts to configure the system to use the Dynamic Braking function may result in system damage and or injury to personnel Personal protection equipment shall be provided and used to protect employees from any hazards inherent to system operation Follow all warnings and precautions and do not exceed equipment ratings System Setup Requirements 4 When using the HX7 ASD as an integral part of a larger system it is the responsibility of the HX7 ASD installer or maintenance personnel to ensure that there is a fail safe in place i e an arrangement designed to switch the system to a safe condition if there is a fault or failure System safety features should be employed and designed into the integrated system in a manner such that system operation even in the event of system failure will not cause harm or result in personnel injury or system damage i e E Off Auto Restart settings System Interlocks etc The programming setup and system configuration of the HX7 ASD may allow it to start th
94. Decel Special This parameter sets the lower limit of the Accel Decel time F508 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 10 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 01 Maximum 10 00 Units Seconds Accel 3 Time Program gt Special Control Parameters gt Accel Decel 1 4 Settings This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the drive to go from 0 0 Hz to the Maximum Frequency for the 3 Acceleration profile The accel decel pattern may be set using F502 The minimum accel decel time may be set using F508 Note An acceleration time shorter than the load will allow may cause nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads Automatic Accel Decel and Stall settings may lengthen the acceleration time Direct Access Number F510 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 1 Maximum 6000 Units Seconds Decel 3 Time Program gt Special Control Parameters Accel Decel 1 4 Settings This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the drive to go from the Maximum Frequency to 0 0 Hz for the 3 Deceleration profile The accel decel pattern may be set using F502 The minimum accel decel time may be set using F508 Note A deceleration time shorter than the load will allow may cause nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads Automatic Accel Decel and Stall settings m
95. Detected alert 146 Direct Access Number F623 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 30 0 Units Hz HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F624 F628 Speed Drop Detection Frequency Range Program Protection Parameters gt Abnormal Speed Settings This parameter sets the lower level of the Base Frequency range that once exceeded will cause a Speed Drop Detected alert Direct Access Number F624 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 30 00 Units Hz Overvoltage Stall Level fast Program Protection Parameters Stall This parameter sets the upper DC bus voltage threshold that once exceeded will cause an Overvoltage Stall An Overvoltage Stall increases the output frequency of the drive during deceleration for a specified time in an attempt to prevent an Overvoltage Trip If the overvoltage condition persists for over 250 uS an Overvoltage Trip will be incurred Note This feature may increase deceleration times Direct Access Number F625 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 50 00 Maximum 250 0 Units Overvoltage Stall Level Program Prote
96. Direct Access Number F119 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Unassigned Changeable During Run No S6 Input Terminal Assignment Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters Input Terminal Assignment gt S6 This parameter selects the functionality of the S6 input terminal Note The S6 input terminal may be used without the ASD Multicom option board Without the ASD Multicom option board the S6 terminal assignment information will be stored in volatile memory The terminal assignment information will be lost if the system is powered down or reset In addition the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This parameter sets the programmable S6 terminal to 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 5 on pg 162 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email Direct Access Number F120 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Unassigned Changeable During Run No 59 info ctiautomation net F121 F123 S7 Input Terminal Assignment Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters gt Input Terminal Assignment gt S7 This parameter selects the functionality of the S7 input terminal Note The S7 input terminal may be used without the ASD Multicom option board Without the ASD Multicom option board the S7 terminal assignment information will be store
97. F150 Out Off Delay F160 Out2 On Delay F151 Out2 Off Delay F161 FL On Delay F152 FL Off Delay F162 g Out4 On Delay F153 Output Terminal Delays Out4 Off Delay F163 Out5 On Delay F154 Out5 Off Delay F164 Out6 On Delay F155 Out6 Off Delay F165 Out7 On Delay F156 Out7 Off Delay F151 FREQUENCY SETTING Analog Filter Analog Input Filter Selection F209 PARAMETERS V LNI RR F210 P RX F216 Speed Reference Setpoint RX2 F222 BIN F228 PG F234 Jog Run Frequency F260 Jog Settings Jog Stop Control F261 Jog Window Enable Disable N A 1 Frequency amp Characteristics F018 2 Frequency amp Characteristics FOLS Preset Speeds nn 3 Frequency amp Characteristics F020 4 Frequency amp Characteristics F021 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual 35 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Program Menu Navigation Parameter Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name aramee Number E 5 FREQUENCY SETTING 5 Frequency amp Characteristics F022 PARAMETERS 6 Frequency amp Characteristics F023 7 Frequency amp Characteristics F024 8 Frequency amp Characteristics F287 9 Frequency amp Characteristics F288 Preset Speeds 10 Frequency amp Characteristics F289 11 Frequency amp Characteristics F290 12 Frequency amp Characteristics F291 13 Frequ
98. Gain Input Direct Access Number F424 Program gt Torque Setting Parameters gt Torque Control Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled This parameter Enables Disables the Load Sharing Gain input function and is enabled by selecting a Load Sharing Gain input signal source Changeable Dunne Run Yes Settings Disabled VIAL RR RX RX2 option LED Keypad Option Binary BCD Input Common Serial TTL RS232 RS485 Communication Card Forward Speed Limit Input Direct Access Number F425 Program Torque Setting Parameters gt Torque Speed Limiting Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled This parameter Enables Disables the Forward Speed Limit Input control function When enabled and operating in the Torque Control mode the forward speed limit is controlled by the terminal selected here If Setting is selected the value set at F426 is used as the Forward Speed Limit input Changeable During Run Yes Settings Disabled VIAL RR RX RX2 option Setting 118 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F426 F429 Forward Speed Limit Level Program Torque Setting Parameters Torque Control This parameter provides a value to be used as the Forward Speed Limit setting if Setting is selected at F425 F426 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Defau
99. HP 150 HP 460 volt gt 150 HP 350 HP 600 volt 150 HP 300 HP The maximum Carrier Frequency setting allowed is 5 0 kHz for The maximum Carrier Frequency setting allowed for all other ASDs is 15 kHz Setting the Carrier Frequency above the Derate Threshold frequency as listed below for a given ASD will reduce the capability of the ASD Carrier Frequency Derate Threshold Frequency Direct Access Number F300 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 2 200 Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 500 Maximum ASD dependent Units kHz Example Derate profile for 15 kHz max carrier Frequency Derate Threshold Frequency o 2 2 kHz 5 0 kHz 6 0 kHz 8 0 kHz HX7 7 2750B 215K 2500 6160 2010 2600 a 2750B 215K 2600 6400 2400 irate 415KB 435K 4400 6400 4015 4330 415KB 435K 412K 4500 410K a eee 615KB 635K 410K 4600 4750 eee ne 4 412K 6015 6120 6220 6330 6220 6330 6500 6750 6500 6750 Break Make ST Direct Access Number F301 Program Protection Parameters Retry Restart This parameter Enables Disables the ability of the drive to start into a spinning motor when the ST CC connection opens momentarily and is then closed Break Make ST or after a power interruption momentary power failure This parameter also Enables Disables F312
100. Hz to the Maximum Frequency for the 4 Acceleration profile The accel decel pattern may be set using F502 The minimum accel decel time may be set using F508 Note An acceleration time shorter than the load will allow may cause nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads Automatic Accel Decel and Stall settings may lengthen the acceleration time Direct Access Number F514 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 1 Maximum 6000 Units Seconds Decel 4 Time Program Special Control Parameters Accel Decel 1 4 Settings This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the drive to go from the Maximum Frequency to 0 0 Hz for the 4 Deceleration profile The accel decel pattern may be set using F502 The minimum accel decel time may be set using F508 Note A deceleration time shorter than the load will allow may cause nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads Automatic Accel Decel and Stall settings may lengthen the deceleration time Direct Access Number F515 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 1 Maximum 6000 Units Seconds 132 Accel Decel Pattern 4 Program gt Special Control Parameters Accel Decel 1 4 Settings This parameter enables a user selected preprogrammed output profile that controls the acceleration a
101. Max Freq F011 Units Hz Speed Limit Torque Range Direct Access Number F432 Program gt Torque Setting Parameters gt Torque Speed Limiting Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 The system has the ability to limit the amount that the speed may vary as a Ch ble Durine R y function of a changing load while operating in the Torque Control mode This aria NUN FES parameter sets a plus or minus value range for the Speed Limit Torque Level Minimum 0 00 F431 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz Speed Limit Torque Recovery Direct Access Number F433 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 20 Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 00 Maximum 2 50 Units Seconds HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F440 F444 Power Running Torque Limit 1 Program gt Torque Setting Parameters gt Torque Limit Settings This parameter determines the source of the control signal for the positive torque limit setting If Setting is selected the value set at F441 is used as the Power Running Torque Limit 1 input Settings VII RR RX RX2 option Setting Direct Access Number F440 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Setting Changeable During Run Yes Driving Torque Limit 1 Program gt Torque Setting Parameters gt Manual Torque Limi
102. Maximum 30 00 Units Hz 143 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F607 F612 Motor 150 OL Time Limit Program gt Protection Parameters gt Overload This parameter establishes a time that the motor may operate at 150 of its rated current before tripping This setting applies the time 150 reference to the individual settings of each motor e g this setting references 150 of the F600 setting for the 1 motor The unit will trip sooner than the time entered here if the overload is greater than 150 Direct Access Number F607 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 600 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 10 Maximum 2400 Units Seconds Inrush Current Suppression Program Protection Parameters gt Soft Start The startup inrush current may be suppressed for up to 2 5 seconds This parameter determines the length of the inrush current suppression F608 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 30 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 30 Maximum 2 50 Units Seconds Interlock with ST Program Protection Parameters gt Soft Start This parameter Enables Disables the ST to CC connection dependency on the successful completion of a Soft Start If enabled the ST to CC connection will happen only after a successful Soft Start Direct Access Number
103. Motor 3 Torque Boost 69 Motor 4 Base Frequency 70 Motor 4 Max Output Voltage 70 Motor 4 Torque Boost 70 Motor 150 OL Time Limit 144 Motor Capacity 116 Motor Constant 1 primary resistance 115 Motor Constant 2 secondary resistance 115 Motor Constant 3 exciting inductance 115 Motor Constant 3 Enable 116 Motor Constant 4 load inertia 116 Motor Constant 5 leakage inductance 116 Motor Counter Data 112 Motor Current Rating 22 Motor Load 31 Motor Overload 30 173 Motor Overload Trip 37 Motor Parameters 41 Motor Rating 21 Motor Set 1 32 41 Motor Set 2 41 Motor Set 3 41 Motor Set 4 41 Motor Settings 41 Motor Shaft Fixing Control 92 Motor Shaft Stationary Control 93 Motor Type 116 Motorized Pot Frequency at Power Down 57 Motorized Pot Settings 36 N Number of PG Input Pulses 109 Number of Poles of Motor 116 Number of Retries 99 O O2A B 10 OC 169 OH 169 OJ 169 OL Reduction Starting Frequency 143 OLI 170 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual OLM 170 OLR 170 ON Input Terminal Assignment 57 On Trip Powerline Switching 107 OP 170 Operation Local 19 Operational and Maintenance Precautions 6 Option PCB Error 173 OT 170 Out put Phase Loss 173 OUTI 8 10 OUT Off Delay 66 OUT On Delay 65 OUT 1 Output Terminal Assignment 62 OUT2 8 10 OUT2 Off Delay 66 OUT2 On Delay 65 OUT2 Output Terminal Assignment 6
104. Normally Open or Normally Closed This parameter sets the programmable terminal 16 to 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 5 on pg 162 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email Direct Access Number F126 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Unassigned Changeable During Run No 61 info ctiautomation net F130 F133 OUT1 Output Terminal Assignment Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters gt Output Terminal Assignment OUT1 This parameter sets the functionality of the OUT1 A amp C output terminals to 1 of the 62 possible functions that are listed in Table 7 on pg 167 The on and off delay times of the OUT1 terminals may be adjusted to provide more response time to the device that is connected to the output terminals In addition the output terminals must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed Direct Access Number F130 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Low Changeable During Run No OUT2 Output Terminal Assignment Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters gt Output Terminal Assignment OUT2 This parameter sets the functionality of the OUT2 A amp C output terminals to 1 of the 62 possible functions that are listed in Table 7 on pg 167 The on and off delay times of the OUT2 terminals may be adjusted to provide more response time
105. Number F504 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 1 Changeable During Run Yes Acc Dec Switching Frequency 1 Program gt Special Control Parameters Accel Decel Special This parameter sets the frequency at which the acceleration control is switched from the Accel 1 profile to the Accel 2 profile during a multiple acceleration profile configuration Direct Access Number F505 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz S Pattern Lower Limit Adjustment Program gt Special Control Parameters gt Accel Decel Special Sets the lower limit of S pattern 1 and 2 Direct Access Number F506 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 25 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 50 00 Units S Pattern Upper Limit Adjustment Program gt Special Control Parameters Accel Decel Special Sets the upper limit frequency of S pattern 1 and 2 130 Direct Access Number F507 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 25 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 50 00 Units HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F508 F512 Accel Decel Lower Limit Time Program gt Special Control Parameters gt Accel
106. Number F709 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Allowed Changeable During Run Yes V f Group No path available Direct Access Only While operating using the LED Keypad Option 1 of 4 V f groups may be selected and run Each V f group is comprised of 4 user defined variables Base Frequency Base Frequency Voltage Manual Torque Boost and Electronic Thermal Protection Expanded descriptions of these parameters may be found in this section Direct Access Parameter Information Settings Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Note If using the LCD EOL press ESC from the Frequency Command screen to access this parameter Direct Access Number F720 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 1 Changeable During Run Yes 154 Stop Pattern No path available Direct Access Only While operating using the LED Keypad Option the Stop Pattern parameter determines the method used to stop the motor when the stop command is issued via a Stop command from the LED Keypad The Decel Stop setting enables the Dynamic Braking system that is setup at F304 or the DC Injection Braking system that is setup at F250 F251 and F252 Not used The Coast Stop setting allows the motor to stop at the rate allowed by the inertia of the load Settings Decel Stop Coast Stop Note The Stop Pattern setting has no effect on the Emergency Off settings of F603 If using the LCD EOL press ESC f
107. OD Feedback Level F736 LOD Restart Delay Time F737 Earth Fault Alarm Level F640 Earth Fault Alarm Time F641 Earth Fault Earth Fault Trip Level F642 Earth Fault Trip Time F643 V f Adjustment Coefficient F183 0 Hz Dead Band Frequency Setting Signal F244 0 Hz Command Stop Function F255 Over Exciting Cooperation F481 Stall Cooperation Gain at Field Weakening F485 Zone Exciting Starting Rate N A Compensation Coefficient for Iron Loss F487 Special Parameters Voltage Compensation Coefficient for Dead N A Time Dead Time Compensation Enable Disable F489 Dead Time Compensation Bias F490 Switching Frequency Between Current and F491 Voltage Optional Analog Terminal Mark N A Current Differential Gain F454 Exciting Strengthening Coefficient F480 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual 43 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Program Menu Navigation Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Patemetet Number SPECIAL CONTROL Enable Disable User Parameter Initialization F709 During Typeform Initialization PARAMETERS Special Parameters Current Vector Control F482 Voltage Vector Control F483 Constant Vector Control F484 44 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F000 F001 Direct Access Parameter Information The HX7 ASD has the ability to
108. R Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 00 This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RR input terminal when the RR terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Torque Changeable During Run Yes Control mode Minimum 0 00 This is accomplished by establishing an associated V f output pattern for a Maximum 250 0 given RR input level Units See RR Speed Reference 1 for further information on this setting This parameter sets RR Torque Reference Setpoint 2 and is the output torque value that is associated with setting of RR Speed Reference 2 while operating in the Torque control mode 80 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F216 F216 RX Speed Reference 1 Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints gt RX This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX input terminal when the RX terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode or the Torque Control mode RX Input Speed Control Setup Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Speed control input at the RX input terminal e Program gt Fundamental Parameters gt Standard Mode Selection gt Frequency Mode 1 gt RX e Program gt Fundamental Parameters gt Standard Mode Selection gt Command Mode gt Use Control Termi
109. RS232 RS485 Baud Rate F820 Parity F801 RS232 RS485 Communication Time Out Time F803 TTL Communication Time Out Action F804 RS232 RS485 Communication Time Out N A Communication Settings Action TTL Communication Interval F805 RS232 RS485 Wire Count F821 RS232 RS485 Response Time F825 TTL Master Output Selection F806 RS232 RS485 Master Output Selection F826 LCD Port Connection N A a Aaa Communication Frequency Point Selection F810 Receive Address F860 Transmit Address F861 Speed Reference Station F862 Speed Reference Address F863 Torque Reference Station F865 20 Settings Torque Reference Address F866 Fault Detect Station Number F868 Station Mode F869 S20 Reset F899 Error Mode F850 Error Detect Time F851 1 Scan Receive F831 2 Scan Receive F832 Scan Receive Settings aise ka 4 Scan Receive F834 5 Scan Receive F835 6 Scan Receive F836 1 Scan Transmit F841 2 Scan Transmit F842 5 3 Scan Transmit F843 Scan Transmit Settings 4 Scan Transmit F844 5 Scan Transmit F845 6 Scan Transmit F846 Communication Error Command Request Disposition on Error F830 40 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Program Menu Navigation Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Paremetet Number COMMUNICATION Optional Parameter 1 F890 Optional Parameters Optional Parameter 3 F892 Optional P
110. Reset key twice e Remotely via the communications channel e Momentarily connecting terminal RES to CC of the Control Terminal Strip or e Via Program gt Utilities gt Type Resets gt Clear Past Trips 176 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Index Symbols 0 Hz Command Function 93 0 Hz Dead Band Signal 91 A Abnormal Speed Detection Filter Time 146 Abnormal Speed Settings 37 Acc Dec Base Frequency Adjustment 149 Acc Dec Group 130 Acc Dec Switching Frequency 1 130 Accel 1 Time 48 Accel 2 Time 128 Accel 3 Time 131 Accel 4 Time 132 Accel Decel 1 4 Settings 42 Accel Decel 1 Settings 32 Accel Decel Lower Limit Time 131 Accel Decel Pattern 1 129 Accel Decel Pattern 2 130 Accel Decel Pattern 3 131 Accel Decel Pattern 4 132 Accel Decel Settings 42 Accel Decel Special 42 Accel Decel Special Display Resolution 154 Accel Decel Switching Frequency 2 132 Accel Decel Switching Frequency 3 133 Acceleration 48 Acceleration Time Adjustment 150 Adjust Accel Decel Automatically 22 Alarm Popups 32 Alarms 169 AM 8 10 31 41 AM Terminal Adjustment 152 AM Terminal Assignment 152 AM FM FP and Analog 1 amp 2 settings 166 Analog 152 Analog Terminal Adjustment 152 Analog Terminal Setting 152 Analog 2 Terminal Adjustment 153 Analog 2 Terminal Setting 15
111. Speed 8 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Speeds Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 Direct Access Number F548 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Skip Changeable During Run No Group 3 Speed Repeat Factor Program Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Speeds This parameter sets the number of times that the enabled preset speeds of Group 3 will be run 0 254 or Infinite Direct Access Number F550 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 1 Changeable During Run No Group 3 Speed 1 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Speeds Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 Direct Access Number F551 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 1 Changeable During Run No Group 3 Speed 2 Program gt Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Speeds Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 Direct Access Number F552 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 2 Changeable During Run No Group 3 Speed 3 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Speeds Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 Direct Access Number F553 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 3 Changeable During Run No Group 3 Speed 4 Program gt Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Speeds Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 Direct Access Number F554 Parameter Type Selection List Fact
112. Speed Frequency 2 and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of RX Speed Reference 2 while operating in the Speed Control mode Direct Access Number F219 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 80 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum Max Freq F011 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz RX Torque Reference Setpoint 1 Program Torque Setting Parameters gt Setpoints gt RX This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX input terminal when the RX terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Torque Control mode This is accomplished by establishing an associated V f output pattern for a given RX input level See RX Speed Reference 1 for further information on this setting This parameter sets RX Torque Reference Setpoint 1 and is the output torque value that is associated with the setting of RX Speed Reference 1 while operating in the Torque control mode Direct Access Number F220 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 250 00 Maximum 250 00 Units HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F221 F221 RX Torque Reference Setpoint 2 Direct Access Number F221 Program gt Torque Setting Parameters gt Setpoints gt RX Parameter Type Numerical Factory Defaul
113. Speeds gt 9 This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 1001 and is identified as Preset Speed 9 The binary number is applied to S1 S4 of the Control Terminal Strip to output the Preset Speed see F018 for further information on this parameter F288 Parameter Type Numerical Direct Access Number Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum Lower Limit F013 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F289 F294 Preset Speed 10 Program Pattern Run Control gt Preset Speeds gt 10 This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 1010 and is identified as Preset Speed 10 The binary number is applied to S1 S4 of the Control Terminal Strip to output the Preset Speed see F018 for further information on this parameter Direct Access Number F289 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum Lower Limit F013 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz Preset Speed 11 Program Pattern Run Control gt Preset Speeds gt 11 This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 1011 and is identified as Preset Speed 11 The binary number is applied to S1 S4 of the Control Terminal Strip to output the Preset Speed see F018 for fu
114. TOSHIBA HX ADJUSTABLE SPEED DRIVE Programming and Operation Manual Document Number 61131 000 Date July 2008 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net HX7 Adjustable Speed Drive Programming and Operation Manual Document Number 61131 000 Date July 2008 UL UL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Introduction Congratulations on the purchase of the new HX7 Adjustable Speed Drive ASD The HX7 ASD is an 18 pulse PWM drive designed for use with 3 phase AC induction motors This 18 pulse design includes an 18 pulse phase shifting autotransformer input with a diode bridge rectifier U S Patent 6396723 Japan Patent pending 2000 179543 The drive has been designed with an 18 pulse input transformer to assist in the compliance of the harmonic distortion limits of standard IEEE 519 1992 at the point of common coupling The HX7 ASD is ideally suited to drive variable torque loads Toshiba s technology quality and reliability enables the motor to develop high torque and provide compensation for motor slip which results in smooth quick starts and highly efficient operation The HX7 ASD uses digitally controlled pulse width modulation The programmable functions may be accessed via the easy to use m
115. The jumpers at the JP1 and the JP2 connectors may be moved from one position to the other to facilitate either half or full duplex operation If no jumpers are used the system will operate in the full duplex mode For more information on the HX7 ASD communication requirements please visit Toshiba website to acquire a copy of the 7 Series Serial Communications User Manual P N 53840 see Drives gt G7 Severe Duty Industrial Manuals and iccdesigns website to acquire a copy of the ASD NANOCOM User Manual Contact your Toshiba representative if more information is required on the ASD NANOCOM Figure 3 Control Board of the HX7 ASD P N 56000 CNU8 Common Serial TTL I O CNU2 RS232 RS485_ signal I O CN3 RS232 RS485 signal 10 eo age Be TR i ns ae CNU1 ee eee ee oe CNU4 x 25 pin D type connector Connects to the Terminal Board CN7 JP1 Jumpers Half Full Duplex selection ASD NANOCOM 12 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net CNU1 1A and CNU2 2A Pinout Control Board CNU1 1A and CNU2 2A pinout RJ 45 connectors Pin CNU1 Pinout CNU1A Pinout Pin CNU2 Pinout CNU2A Pinout Control Board EOI Control Board EOI 1 P24 P24 1 P24 P24 2 Gnd Gnd 2 Gnd Gnd 3 Tx RXA 3 Rx Tx 4 Rx TXA 4 Gnd Gnd 5 Rx TXB 5 Tx Rx 6 Tx
116. This parameter Enables Disables a continuous DC injection at half of the amperage setting of F251 into a stopped motor This feature is useful in preheating the motor or to keep the rotor from spinning freely Motor Shaft Stationary Control starts after the DC injection brake stops the motor and continues until ST CC is opened power is turned off receiving an Emergency Off command or this parameter is changed Enabling this feature will also require a non zero entry at F250 Settings Box checked Enabled Box not checked Disabled Direct Access Number F254 Parameter Type Check Box Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run Yes 0 Hz Command Function Program gt Special Control Parameters Special Parameters Dead Band of 0 Hz Frequency This parameter selects the go to zero method to be used by the ASD when the ASD is commanded to go to zero Hz Settings Standard DC Injection Braking 0 Hz Command HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F255 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Standard DC Injection Braking Changeable During Run No 93 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F260 F260 Jog Run Frequency Direct Access Number F260 Program gt Frequency Setting Parameters gt Jog Settings Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 This parameter
117. This parameter is used to set the negative torque upper limit for the 3 motor profile when multiple motors are controlled by a single drive or when a single motor is to be controlled by multiple profiles Direct Access Number F447 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 250 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 250 0 Units Driving Torque Limit 4 Program gt Torque Setting Parameters gt Manual Torque Limit Settings This parameter is used to set the positive torque upper limit for the 4 motor profile when multiple motors are controlled by a single drive or when a single motor is to be controlled by multiple profiles Direct Access Number F448 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 250 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 250 0 Units Regeneration Torque Limit 4 Program gt Torque Setting Parameters gt Manual Torque Limit Settings This parameter is used to set the negative torque upper limit for the 4 motor profile when multiple motors are controlled by a single drive or when a single motor is to be controlled by multiple profiles Direct Access Number F449 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 250 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 250 0 Units Torque Limit Mode Program gt Torque Setting Parameters gt Torque Limit Settings gt Torque Limit Mode Contact Tosh
118. This parameter provides a divisor for the pulse input when operating in the Pulse Control mode Forward H C Position Pulse 1 F 371 Control g Reverse Pulse Encoder Feedback F371 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 4 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 100 0 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F372 F377 Position Completion Range Program gt Feedback Parameters gt PG Settings During a deceleration ramp this parameter sets a speed range that must be attained before the Stop command may be executed Direct Access Number F372 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 1 Maximum 4000 Frequency Limit at Position Program Feedback Parameters gt PG Settings While operating in the Position Control mode and using PG feedback this setting determines the maximum acceleration rate in Hz second Direct Access Number F373 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 800 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 1 Maximum 8001 Units Hz Second Current Control Proportional Gain Program Feedback Parameters gt PG Settings This parameter sets the sensitivity of the drive when monitoring the output cur
119. Trip is activated i aaa as This parameter sets the start time of the count down timer i Maximum 2 50 Units Seconds Acc Dec Base Frequency Adjustment Direct Access Number F650 Program Terminal Selection Parameters gt Analog Input Functions Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled This parameter Enables Disables the feature that allows for the external Ch ble During R y adjustment of the Base Frequency When enabled either VIAI or RR may be angad E UNNE SUN LES used as an input source for the modification of the Base Frequency setting Settings Disabled VIM RR Upper Limit Frequency Adjustment Direct Access Number F651 Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters gt Analog Input Functions Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled This parameter Enables Disables the feature that allows for the external Ch ble Durine R y adjustment of the Upper Limit When enabled either VI or RR may be used etree eee eee as an input source for the modification of the Upper Limit setting Settings Disabled VIAL RR HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual 149 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F652 F654 Acceleration Time Adjustment Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters gt Analog Input Functions This parameter Enables Disables the feature that allows for the external adjustment of the Acceleration Time Selec
120. X X X Communication Card 0 1 X X X X RS232 RS485 0 0 1 X X X Common Serial 0 0 0 1 X X Panel LED Keypad 0 0 0 0 1 X Control Terminal 0 0 0 0 0 F003 F004 Setting F003 F004 Setting Command Control Selections The following is a listing and description of the Command Mode F003 selections Program gt Eoin canton iain se Fundamental Parameters gt Standard Mode Selection gt Command Mode Use Control Terminal Strip Command Mode Frequency Mode 1 Settings Use Control Terminal Strip Frequency Mode 2 Allows for Command control input via the 25 pin terminal strip on the Control Terminal Strip PCB Use LED Keypad Option The LED Keypad is unavailable at the time of this release Use Common TTL Set the LCD Port Connection to Common Serial TTL to use this feature Use RS232 RS485 Set the LCD Port Connection to RS232 RS485 to use this feature Use Communication Card Routes the control and monitoring I O to CNU3 of the Control Board of the HX7 ASD Communication Card connector HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual 27 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Frequency Control Selections The following is a listing and description of the Frequency Mode F003 selections Program gt Command Mode Use Control Terminal Strip Fundamental Parameters gt Standard Mode Selection gt Frequency Mode 1 Pecna Me
121. X2 Torque Reference Setpoint 1 Set RX2 Torque Reference Setpoint 1 F226 e Set RX2 Speed Reference 2 F224 the input signal level that represents RX2 Torque Reference Setpoint 2 e Set RX2 Torque Reference Setpoint 2 F227 Provide a Run command F and or R Once set as the RX2 input changes the output torque of the ASD will vary in accordance with the above settings This parameter sets RX2 Speed Reference 1 and is the input signal level that is associated with the setting of RX2 Torque Reference Setpoint 1 while operating in the Torque Control mode 84 i Output Torque F226 F227 1 4 RX Torque Ref Setpoint m 2 4 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F223 F226 RX2 Speed Frequency 1 Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints gt RX2 This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX2 input terminal when the RX2 terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode See RX2 Speed Reference 1 F222 for further information on this setting This parameter sets RX2 Speed Frequency 1 and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of RX2 Speed Reference 1 while operating in the Speed Control mode F223 Parameter Type Numerical Direct Access Number Factory Default 0 0
122. X7 Adjustable Speed Drive The information provided in this manual is applicable to the HX7 Adjustable Speed Drive only See the drawing package and the W7 ASD Installation and Operation Manual provided with the system for ratings information as it pertains to your HX7 Adjustable Speed Drive Read the W7 ASD Installation and Operation Manual completely and review the items of the drawing package for installation and connectivity applicables before applying power programming or operating the HX7 Adjustable Speed Drive This programming and operation manual provides information on the various features and functions of this powerful cost saving device including system operation configuration and menu options Included is a section on general safety instructions that describe the warning labels and symbols that are used throughout the manual Read the manual completely before operating performing maintenance or disposing of this equipment This manual should be considered a permanent part of the equipment and should be readily available for reference and review Because of our commitment to continuous improvement Toshiba International Corporation reserves the right without prior notice to update information make product changes or to discontinue any product or service identified in this publication Toshiba International Corporation TIC shall not be liable for direct indirect special or consequential damages resulting from the use of
123. Yes Settings None Small Medium Large The analog input signal is sampled and converted to a digital signal With no filtering applied the digital value from the conversion is scaled for use by the microprocessor of the ASD If the filtering selection is Small the ASD averages the last 5 sampled digital values The rolling average is updated every 4 uS and scaled for use by the microprocessor If the filtering selection is Medium the ASD averages the last 20 sampled digital values The rolling average is updated every 4 uS and scaled for use by the microprocessor If the filtering selection is Large the ASD averages the last 50 sampled digital values The rolling average is updated every 4 uS and scaled for use by the microprocessor False responses to electrical noise are eliminated with no loss in bandwidth because the value used by the drive is the average value of several samples HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual 77 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F210 F210 RR Speed Reference 1 Direct Access Number F210 Program gt Frequency Setting Parameters gt Speed Reference Parameter Type Numerical Setpoints RR Factory Default 0 0 This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RR input terminal when Changeable During Run Yes the RR terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Minimum
124. able During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 255 Exciting Strengthening Coefficient Program Special Control Parameters gt Special Parameters gt Exciting Strengthening Coefficient This parameter determines the rate at which the excitation current is allowed to go from zero to saturation and is enabled at F481 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual F480 Parameter Type Numerical Direct Access Number Factory Default 64 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 255 125 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F481 F486 Over Exciting Cooperation Program gt Special Control Parameters gt Special Parameters gt Over Exciting Cooperation This parameter determines the method used to control the rate that the excitation current is allowed to reach saturation If Effective is selected the preset Torque Control or Speed Control settings will determine the rate that the motor reaches excitation saturation Settings Effective Applied by F480 Direct Access Number F481 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Effective Changeable During Run Yes Current Vector Control Program Special Control Parameters gt Special Parameters gt Control Margin Modulation gt Current Vector Control This parameter establishes the control margin of modulation when operating in the Curren
125. age Compensation Enable Disable Base Frequency Voltage a F307 Output Voltage Limitation Enable Disable Suppression of Inrush Current Timing F608 Soft Start l Interlock with ST F609 j TORQUE SETTING wA s PARAMETERS RR F214 Set Points RX F220 RX2 F226 BIN F232 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual 37 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Program Menu Navigation Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name pices ToRQUE SETTING Torque Command Selection F420 PARAMETERS Torque Command Filter F421 Torque Control Synchronized Torque Bias Input Selection F422 Tension Torque Bias Input Selection F423 Load Sharing Gain Input Selection F424 Positive Torque Limit 1Selection F440 Negative Torque Limit 1Selection F442 Torque Limit Settings Manual Settings F441 Torque Limit Mode F450 Torque Limit Mode speed dependent F451 1 Positive Negative Torque Limit Settings F441 Manual Torque Limit 2 Positive Negative Torque Limit Settings F444 Settings 3 Positive Negative Torque Limit Settings F446 4 Positive Negative Torque Limit Settings F448 Torque Command Mode Selection F429 Forward Speed Limit Selection F425 Forward Speed Limit Level F426 Reverse Speed Limit Selection F427 Torque Speed Limiting Reverse Speed Limit Level F428 Speed Li
126. aking Answer response must be received or 2 the brake must release Should this timer setting expire before the Braking Answer is returned or the brake releases a Brake Fault is incurred Otherwise the brake releases and normal motor operations resume F630 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 10 00 Units Seconds Position Difference Limit Program Feedback Parameters gt Feedback Settings Position Difference Limit While operating in the Position Control mode this parameter sets the maximum allowed difference between the commanded position and resulting position as indicated by encoder pulses F631 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 16 0 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 1 Maximum 6553 Release After Run Timer Program gt Protection Parameters gt Brake Fault Timer This parameter sets the time that the brake will hold after the Run command criteria has been met F632 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 00 Maximum 2 50 Units Seconds 148 Earth Fault Alarm Level Program gt Protection gt Earth Fault Alarm Level This parameter sets the threshold level that must be exceeded to meet the Earth Fault Alarm activation crite
127. alization 154 Proportional P Gain 109 Proportional Integral Derivative PID 108 Protection Parameters 36 PtSt 170 PWM Carrier Frequency 98 Q Qualified Personnel 2 R R 8 9 R Input Terminal Assignment 57 R Input Terminal Delay 64 R F Priority Selection 55 RAM Err 175 Reach Settings 34 Realtime Clock Setup 32 Reference Priority Selection 73 Regeneration Torque Limit 1 121 Regeneration Torque Limit 2 122 Regeneration Torque Limit 3 122 Regeneration Torque Limit 4 122 Regeneration Torque Limit Setting 1 121 Release After Run Timer brake 148 RES 8 9 RES Input Terminal Assignment 58 RES Input Terminal Delay 64 Reset 47 Reset Key 17 Retry Restart Configuration 36 Reverse Speed Limit Input 119 Reverse Speed Limit Level 119 Review Startup Screen 33 Ridethrough Mode 99 ROM Err 175 Root Menus 29 Rotary Encoder 17 RR 8 9 31 RR Bias Adjust 124 RR Gain Adjust 124 RR Input Speed Control Setup 78 RR Input Torque Control Setup 78 RR Speed Frequency 1 79 RR Speed Frequency 2 79 RR Speed Reference 1 78 RR Speed Reference 2 79 RR Torque Reference Setpoint 1 79 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual RR Torque Reference Setpoint 2 80 RS232 12 RS232 RS485 Baud Rate 160 RS232 RS485 Communications Time Out Time 157 RS232 RS485 Communications Time Out Action 158 RS232 RS485 Master Output 161 RS232 RS485 Response Delay Time 161 RS232 RS485 Wi
128. allow the user direct access to the motor control functions The functions listed below have an associated Parameter Number which accesses its setting There are two ways in which the motor control parameters may be accessed for modification Program gt applicable menu path or Program gt Direct Access gt applicable parameter number Both methods access the parameter via the Program mode Once accessed the parameter may be viewed or changed The Program mode allows the user to develop an application specific motor control profile Motor control functions may be set to accommodate specific power and timing requirements for a given application The configurable parameters of the Program mode that have user accessible Parameter Numbers are listed and described below Note The setup procedures included within this section may require a Reset before performing the procedure Application specific settings may then be performed The pre Reset conditions may be saved see F007 Direct Access Parameters Numbers Automatic Accel Decel 1 Direct Access Number F000 Program Fundamental Parameters Parameter Type Check Box Factory Default Disabled This parameter Enables Disables the ability of the ASD to adjust the acceleration and deceleration rates in accordance with the applied load automatically Changeable During Run No The adjusted acceleration and deceleration times range from 12 5 to 800 of the programmed values for
129. am gt Special Control Parameters Crane Hoist Settings gt Express Speed Settings Heavy Load Torque During Forward Acceleration During forward acceleration this parameter establishes the threshold torque level that is used to determine if the Light Load High Speed F331 operation may engage or remain engaged if active If the Light Load High Speed operation is terminated normal operation resumes Direct Access Number F336 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 150 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 250 Units Heavy Load Torque During Forward Deceleration Program Special Control Parameters Crane Hoist Settings gt Express Speed Settings Heavy Load Torque During Forward Deceleration During forward deceleration this parameter establishes the threshold torque level that is used to determine if the Light Load High Speed F331 operation may engage or remain engaged if active If the Light Load High Speed operation is terminated normal operation resumes Direct Access Number F337 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 250 Units Switching Load Torque During Reverse Run Program gt Special Control Parameters Crane Hoist Settings gt Express Speed Settings Switching Load Torque During Reverse Run While running in reverse this parameter establishes the threshold torque level tha
130. arameter 4 F893 Optional Parameter 5 F894 METER TERMINAL FM FM Terminal Assignment F005 ADJUSTMENT FM Terminal Adjustment F006 PARAMETERS AM AM Terminal Assignment F670 AM Terminal Adjustment F671 Analog 1 Terminal Assignment F672 Analog1 Analog 1 Terminal Adjustment F673 Analog 2 Terminal Assignment F674 Analog2 Analog 2 Terminal Adjustment F675 Motor PARAMETERS AutoTune Enable Disable and Reset Config F400 AutoTune Enable Disable of Motor Constant 3 F414 Slip Frequency Gain F401 Motor Constant 1 primary resistance F402 Vector Motor Model Motor Constant 2 secondary resistance F403 Motor Constant 3 exciting inductance F404 Motor Constant 4 load inertia F405 Motor Constant 5 leakage inductance F410 Number of Motor Poles F411 Motor Settings Motor Capacity kW F412 Motor Type F413 1 Base Frequency F014 1 Max Output Voltage F306 Motor Set 1 1 Torque Boost F016 1 Electronic Thermal Protection Level F600 2 Base Frequency F170 2 Max Output Voltage F171 Motor Set 2 2 Torque Boost F172 2 Electronic Thermal Protection Level F173 3 Base Frequency F174 3 Max Output Voltage F175 Motor Set 3 3 Torque Boost F176 3 Electronic Thermal Protection Level F177 4 Base Frequency F178 4 Max Output Voltage F179 Motor Set 4 4 Torque Boost F180 4 Electronic Thermal Protection Level F181 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual
131. arameters gt Cooling Fan Settings This parameter sets the cooling fan run time command Settings Automatic Always On Internal External Temp Controlled Internal Auto External Temp Controlled Internal Temp Controlled External Auto Direct Access Number F620 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Automatic Changeable During Run Yes Cumulative Run Timer Alarm Setting Program gt Protection Parameters Cumulative Run Timer This parameter sets a run time value that once exceeded closes a contact The output signal may be used to control external equipment or used to engage a brake Note The time displayed is 1 10th of the actual time 0 1 hr 1 0 hr Direct Access Number F621 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 175 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 1 Maximum 999 9 Units Hours X 100 Abnormal Speed Detection Filter Time Program Protection Parameters Abnormal Speed Settings This parameter sets the time that an overspeed condition must exist to cause a trip Direct Access Number F622 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 10 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 01 Maximum 100 0 Units Seconds Overspeed Detection Frequency Range Program Protection Parameters Abnormal Speed Settings This parameter sets the upper level of the Base Frequency range that once exceeded will cause an Overspeed
132. are disabled both boxes checked the received direction command will determine the direction of the motor rotation Settings Disabled Enabled HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual F311 Parameter Type Check Box Direct Access Number Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run No 101 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F312 F315 Scan Rate Program Protection Parameters Retry Restart In the event of a momentary power outage the output signal of the drive will cease Upon restoration of power the drive will output a low level signal that will be used to determine the rotation speed of the rotor The low level signal will start scanning the motor at the Maximum Frequency and decrease until it reaches 0 0 Hz or it matches the signal produced by the turning rotor Once the rate of rotation is determined the drive will provide the normal output to engage the motor from its present speed This parameter determines the rate at which the scanning signal goes from the Maximum Frequency to 0 0 Hz See F301 for additional information on this parameter F312 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD dependent Direct Access Number Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 50 Maximum 2 50 Lock on Rate Program Protection Parameters Retry Restart After a momentary power outage the ASD may have to s
133. arting torque Direct Access Number F009 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 1 Maximum 6000 Units Seconds Decel 1 Time Program Fundamental Parameters Accel Decel 1 Settings This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the drive to go from the Maximum Frequency to 0 0 Hz for the 1 Deceleration profile The accel decel pattern may be set using F502 When operating with the Automatic Accel Decel enabled F000 the minimum accel decel time may be set using F508 Note A deceleration time shorter than the load will allow may cause nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads Automatic Accel Decel and Stall settings may lengthen the acceleration time Direct Access Number F010 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 1 Maximum 6000 Units Seconds HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F011 F014 Maximum Frequency Program gt Fundamental Parameters gt Frequency Settings This setting determines the absolute maximum frequency that the ASD can output Accel decel times are calculated based on the Maximum Frequency setting Note This setting may not be lower than the Upper Limit setting F012 Direct Access Number F
134. at F160 The delay may be increased to allow the devices that are connected to OUTS to respond Direct Access Number F164 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 2 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 2 0 Maximum 200 0 Units mS OUT6 Off Delay Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters Output Terminal Delays gt OUT6 This parameter delays the opening of the OUT6 output terminals by the programmed value see waveforms at F160 The delay may be increased to allow the devices that are connected to OUT6 to respond Direct Access Number F165 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 2 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 2 0 Maximum 200 0 Units mS OUT7 Off Delay Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters Output Terminal Delays gt OUT7 This parameter delays the opening of the OUT7 output terminals by the programmed value see waveforms at F160 The delay may be increased to allow the devices that are connected to OUT7 to respond HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual F166 Parameter Type Numerical Direct Access Number Factory Default 2 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 2 0 Maximum 200 0 Units mS 67 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F170 F173 Motor 2 Base Frequency Program gt Motor Parameters gt Motor Set 2 The
135. at no activity may exist over the communications link before the link is severed Time Out The communications network includes other ASDs and Host Control computers that monitor the status of the ASD s transfers commands and loads or modifies the parameter settings of the ASD Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled Off then On for the changes to take effect HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual F803 Parameter Type Numerical Direct Access Number Factory Default 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Units Seconds 157 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F804 F806 RS232 RS485 Communications Time Out Action Program Communication Setting Parameters Communication Settings This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by determining the action to be taken in the event of a time out Time Out Action The communications network includes other ASDs and Host Control computers that monitor the status of the ASD s transfers commands and loads or modifies the parameter settings of the drive Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled Off then On for the changes to take effect Settings No Action Alarm Trip F804 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default Trip Changeable Duri
136. at which the At Frequency Powerline Switching function engages The At Frequency Powerline Switching function commands the system to discontinue using the output of the drive and to switch to commercial power once reaching the frequency set here F355 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 60 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz ASD side Switching Wait Time Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters gt Line Power Switching This parameter determines the amount of time that the drive will wait before outputting a signal to the motor once the switch to drive output criteria has been met OUT1 Commercial Power N f SD Motor s2 gt Switch to drive command DUTE HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual F356 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD dependent Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 01 Maximum 10 00 Units Seconds 107 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F357 F361 Commercial Power Wait Time Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters gt Line Power Switching This parameter determines the amount of time that the drive will wait before allowing commercial power to be applied to the motor once the switch to commercial powe
137. ate injury CAUTION The word CAUTION without the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation exists which if not avoided may result in equipment and property damage CAUTION HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Special Symbols To identify special hazards other symbols may appear in conjunction with the DANGER WARNING and CAUTION signal words These symbols indicate areas that require special and or strict adherence to the procedures to prevent serious injury to personnel or death Electrical Hazard Symbol A symbol which indicates a hazard of injury from electrical AN shock or burn It is comprised of an equilateral triangle enclosing a lightning bolt Explosion Hazard Symbol A symbol which indicates a hazard of injury from exploding LA parts It is comprised of an equilateral triangle enclosing an explosion image Equipment Warning Labels Warning labels that are attached to the equipment will include the exclamation mark within a triangle DO NOT remove or cover any of these labels If the labels are damaged or if additional labels are required contact your Toshiba sales representative for additional labels Labels attached to the equipment are there to provide useful information or to indicate an imminently hazardous situation that may result in serious injury severe property and equipment
138. ation Load A i F332 Waiting Time Light load High speed Operation Load F333 Detection Time Light load High speed Operation Heavy Load F334 Crane Hoist Load Detection Time Switching Load Torque During Forward Run F335 Heavy Load Torque During Acceleration in F336 the Forward Direction a Heavy Load Torque During Fixed Speed in F337 Forward Run Switching Load Torque During Reverse Run F338 Heavy Load Torque During Acceleration in eee F339 the Reverse Direction 42 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Program Menu Navigation Parameter Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name arammete Number SPECIAL CONTROL Heavy Load Torque During Fixed Speed in F340 Reverse Run PARAMETERS Crane Hoist Load _ Frequency for Automatic High speed F341 Operation at Light Load i 1 Frequency Setting F190 1 Voltage Setting F191 2 Frequency Setting F192 2 Voltage Setting F193 3 Frequency Setting F194 V f Five Point Setting 3 Voltage Setting F195 4 Frequency Setting F196 4 Voltage Setting F197 5 Frequency Setting F198 5 Voltage Setting F199 LOD Control and Stopping Method F731 LOD Start Level F732 LOD Start Time F733 Low Outpur Disable LOD Setpoint Boost F734 Function LOD Boost Time F735 L
139. ation on this parameter Direct Access Number F021 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum Lower Limit F013 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz Preset Speed 5 Program Pattern Run Control gt Preset Speeds gt 5 This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 0101 and is identified as Preset Speed 5 The binary number is applied to S1 S4 of the Control Terminal Strip to output the Preset Speed see F018 for further information on this parameter Direct Access Number F022 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum Lower Limit F013 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz Preset Speed 6 Program Pattern Run Control gt Preset Speeds gt 6 This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 0110 and is identified as Preset Speed 6 The binary number is applied to S1 S4 of the Control Terminal Strip to output the Preset Speed see F018 for further information on this parameter Direct Access Number F023 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum Lower Limit F013 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz Preset Speed 7 Program Pattern Run Control gt Preset Speeds gt 7 This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 0111 and is identified as Preset Speed 7 The
140. automation net Override Operation The command registers of the listed signal sources are scanned in the order that they are listed in Table 3 to determine which input sources are in the Override mode During each register scan cycle the first item detected as having the Override function turned on is the selection that is used for Command or Frequency control input The Override control setting supersedes the setting of the Command mode setting F003 and the Frequency mode setting F004 However the F003 and F004 settings will be used in the event that the register scan returns the condition that none of the listed items have the Override feature turned on see Table 3 Command and Frequency Control Override Hierarchy Table 3 lists the input conditions and the resulting output control source selections for Command and Frequency control Override operation The HX7 ASD reads the command registers of the listed control items from the left to the right In the table the number indicates that the Override feature is turned on for that control input source X Don t are and 0 Override Off The first item to be read that has the Override feature turned on will be used for Command or Frequency control Table 3 Command and Frequency control hierarchy 1 2 3 4 5 6 Priority Level Communication RS232 Common eS Control Terminal F003 F004 Command Card RS485 Serial K Binary BCD Input Frequency Mode 1 X X
141. ay lengthen the deceleration time Direct Access Number F511 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 1 Maximum 6000 Units Seconds Accel Decel Pattern 3 Program gt Special Control Parameters Accel Decel 1 4 Settings This parameter enables a user selected preprogrammed output profile that controls the acceleration and deceleration pattern for the 3 Accel Decel parameter Settings Linear S Pattern 1 S Pattern 2 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F512 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Linear Changeable During Run Yes 131 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F513 F516 Accel Decel Switching Frequency 2 Program gt Special Control Parameters Accel Decel Special This parameter sets the frequency at which the acceleration control is switched from the Accel 2 profile to the Accel 3 profile during a multiple acceleration profile configuration F513 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz Accel 4 Time Program gt Special Control Parameters Accel Decel 1 4 Settings This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the drive to go from 0 0
142. be established for normal operation Frequency commands control the output speed of the ASD The source of the frequency speed control signal must be established for normal operation The source of the command control and speed control may be either internal or external Once the source signal is selected for either function the system may be configured to use the selected signal all of the time or switch to another source under user defined conditions Command and Frequency control may be carried out using any one of several control methods signal sources or combinations thereof In the event that simultaneous control commands are received from the various sources the signal sources are assigned priority levels and proper system operation is maintained The primary control method for Command and Frequency control uses the settings of F003 and F004 respectively Command Control F003 The Command Mode selection of F003 establishes 5 the primary source of the command input for the ASD However the Override feature may supersede the Command Mode F003 setting as indicated in Table 3 on page 27 Use Control Terminal Strip Frequency Mode 1 Use RR Frequency Mode 2 Table 3 shows the hierarchy of the control sources managed by the Override function The level of the control item on the hierarchy is listed from left to right highest to lowest respectively As indicated in the table the Override setting may supersede the F003 setti
143. binary number is applied to S1 S4 of the Control Terminal Strip to output the Preset Speed see F018 for further information on this parameter Direct Access Number F024 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum Lower Limit F013 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz Low Speed Signal Output Frequency Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters gt Reach Settings The Low Speed Signal Output Frequency parameter sets a frequency threshold that activates the assigned output terminal so long as the ASD output is at or above this setting see Table 7 on pg 167 for the available output assignments HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F100 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz 53 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F101 F102 Speed Reach Frequency Direct Access Number F101 Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters Reach Settings Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 The Speed Reach Frequency sets a frequency threshold that when reached or is within the bandwidth specified by parameter F102 will provide a signal at an Changeable During Run Yes output terminal that can close an appropriately configured output contact see Min
144. ble During Run Yes Reference speed control input Minimum 0 00 See F811 for further information on this setting Maximum Max Freq F011 This parameter sets Communications Speed Frequency 1 and is the Units Hz frequency that is associated with the setting of Communications Speed Reference 1 Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled Off then On for the changes to take effect Communications Speed Reference 2 Direct Access Number F813 Program Communication Setting Parameters Communication Parameter Type Numerical Reference Adjust Factory Default 100 0 This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the Communications Speed Changeable During R n Yes Reference 2 speed control input Minimum 0 00 See F811 for further information on this setting Maximum 100 0 This parameter sets the Communications Speed Reference 2 input value that Units represents Communications Speed Frequency 2 This value is entered as 0 to 100 of the Communications Speed Reference 2 input value range Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled Off then On for the changes to take effect Communications Speed Frequency 2 Direct Access Number F814 Program gt Communication Setting Parameters gt Communication Parameter Type Numerical Reference Adjust Factory Default 80 0 This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the Communications Speed Cee Dun
145. by establishing the Parity setting of the communications link The communications network includes other ASDs and Host Control computers that monitor the status of the ASD s transfers commands and loads or modifies the parameter settings of the ASD Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled Off then On for the changes to take effect Settings No Parity Even Parity Odd Parity Direct Access Number F801 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Even Parity Changeable During Run Yes ASD Number Program gt Communication Setting Parameters Communication Settings This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by assigning an identification ID number to each ASD in the communications network The communications network includes other ASDs and Host Control computers that monitor the status of the ASD s transfers commands and loads or modifies the parameter settings of the ASD Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled Off then On for the changes to take effect F802 Parameter Type Numerical Direct Access Number Factory Default 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 255 RS232 RS485 Communications Time Out Time Program gt Communication Setting Parameters Communication Settings This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by setting the time th
146. ccess Number Factory Default Terminal Block Changeable During Run No 46 Frequency Mode 1 Program Fundamental Parameters Standard Mode Selection gt Frequency Mode 1 The Frequency Mode 1 setting establishes the source of the frequency control input for the ASD The Override feature may supersede the Frequency Mode 1 setting see Command Mode and Frequency Mode Control on pg 32 Note Only Bolded items from the Settings list below may be placed in the Override mode See the section titled Command Mode and Frequency Mode Control on pg 32 for further information on the Override feature Settings se VI II se RR se RX se Option Card RX2 se LED Keypad Option se Binary BCD Input se Common Serial TTL se RS232 RS485 se Communication Card se Motorized Pot Simulation se Pulse Input Option qaeaeaaqqataacacge Direct Access Number F004 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Use RR Changeable During Run No HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F005 F007 FM Terminal Assignment Direct Access Number F005 Program gt Meter Terminal Adjustment Parameters gt FM Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Output Frequency This parameter assigns a function to the FM output terminal The FM output terminal produces an output current that is propo
147. cess Number F596 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 5 Changeable During Run No Minimum 1 Maximum 8000 Units Seconds Pattern Run 13 Run Time Setting Program Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Preset Speeds gt 13 This parameter sets the run time value for the 13 Preset Speed mode when used as part of a Pattern Run Direct Access Number F597 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 5 Changeable During Run No Minimum 1 Maximum 8000 Units Seconds Pattern Run 14 Run Time Setting Program Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Preset Speeds gt 14 This parameter sets the run time value for the 14 Preset Speed mode when used as part of a Pattern Run HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F598 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 5 Changeable During Run No Minimum 1 Maximum 8000 Units Seconds 141 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F599 F602 Pattern Run 15 Run Time Setting Program gt Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Preset Speeds gt 15 This parameter sets the run time value for the 15 Preset Speed mode when used as part of a Pattern Run Direct Access Number F599 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 5 Changeable During Run No Minimum 1 Maximum 8000 Unit
148. change the full scale reading of the AM TB3 and FM TB2 output terminals See F005 and F670 for more information on the AM and FM terminals TB1 input and output terminals of the Terminal Board aN SW1 7 SW2 nA lt j 4 20 mA O mA AA 420 MA II Terminals HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual 11 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net HX7 ASD Control The Control Board P N 56000 serves as the primary control source for the HX7 ASD and may receive control input from the Terminal Board an Option Card RS232 RS485 Communications or the HX7 EOI The Control Board supports Multiple Protocol Communications and the ability to communicate in either half or full duplex modes Using the optional multiple protocol communications interface the ASD NANOCOM the Control Board may be configured for the type of communications protocol being received and respond appropriately to the sending device The ASD NANOCOM connects to the J4 and J5 connectors see Figure 3 A jumper board P N 55365 is required at the J4 connector if not using the ASD NANOCOM The ASD NANOCOM must be setup to support the desired communications protocol via Program gt Comm Settings Consult the ASD NANOCOM User s Manual P N 10572 1 000 000 for a complete listing of the setup requirements Half or Full duplex communications is available when using RS232 RS485 communications
149. cted into the windings of the motor to quickly brake the motor Accel Decel Switching 1 Accel Decel Switching 2 Activating combinations of discrete input terminals Accel Decel Switching 1 and 2 allow for the selection of Accel Decel profiles 1 4 as shown below See F504 for more information on this terminal setting A D SW Terminal A D Selection 1 2 The settings of the A D selections 1 4 are performed at F009 F010 F500 F501 F510 F511 and F514 F515 respectively Accel Decel profiles are comprised of the Accel Decel settings Pattern and Switching Frequency CO m Oo oO BR Wl N 1 Terminal Activated V f Switching 1 V f Switching 2 Activating combinations of discrete input terminals V f Switching 1 and 2 allow for the selection of a V f switching profile as listed below V f Switching Terminal V f Selection 1 2 0 0 I The 1 4 settings of the V f Switching selections are performed at parameters F170 F181 0 1 2 1 0 3 1 1 4 1 Terminal Activated 14 Motor 1 2 Switching Motor control may be switched between the Motor 1 profile to the Motor 2 profile if using a multiple motor profile configuration 15 Motor 3 4 Switching Motor control may be switched between the Motor 3 profile to the Motor 4 profile if using a multiple motor profile configuration 16 Torq
150. cteristics Pattern Run 139 Pattern 13 Characteristics Pattern Run 139 Pattern 14 Characteristics Pattern Run 139 Pattern 15 Characteristics Pattern Run 139 Pattern 2 Characteristics Pattern Run 138 Pattern 3 Characteristics Pattern Run 138 Pattern 4 Characteristics Pattern Run 138 Pattern 5 Characteristics Pattern Run 138 Pattern 6 Characteristics Pattern Run 138 Pattern 7 Characteristics Pattern Run 138 Pattern 8 Characteristics Pattern Run 138 Pattern 9 Characteristics Pattern Run 138 Pattern Run 39 133 Pattern Run 1 Run Time Setting 139 Pattern Run 10 Run Time Setting 141 Pattern Run 11 Run Time Setting 141 Pattern Run 12 Run Time Setting 141 Pattern Run 13 Run Time Setting 141 Pattern Run 14 Run Time Setting 141 Pattern Run 15 Run Time Setting 142 Pattern Run 2 Continuation Mode Run Time Setting 139 Pattern Run 3 Run Time Setting 140 Pattern Run 4 Run Time Setting 140 Pattern Run 5 Run Time Setting 140 Pattern Run 6 Run Time Setting 140 Pattern Run 7 Run Time Setting 140 Pattern Run 8 Run Time Setting 140 Pattern Run 9 Run Time Setting 141 Pattern Run Control Parameters 39 Pattern Run Description 133 Pattern Run Setup 133 PB 100 Peak Current 31 Peak Voltage 31 PG Disconnect Detection 110 182 PG Input Phases 110 PG Input Speed Control Setup 89 PG Position 31 PG Settings 38 PG Speed 31 PG Speed Frequency 1 90 PG Speed Frequenc
151. ction List Direct Access Number Factory Default Forward Changeable During Run No Vector Motor Model Autotune Command Program Motor Parameters Vector Motor Model This parameter sets the Autotune command status Settings Autotune Disabled Reset Motor Defaults Enable Autotune on Run Command Direct Access Number F400 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Autotune Disabled Changeable During Run No Vector Motor Model Slip Frequency Gain Program Motor Parameters gt Vector Motor Model This parameter provides a degree of slip compensation for a given load A higher setting here decreases the slip allowed for a given load ASD output ratio Direct Access Number F401 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 60 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 2 55 Motor Constant 1 primary resistance Program Motor Parameters Vector Motor Model This parameter is the measurement of the stator resistance and is considered a Motor Constant unchanging This value is used in conjunction with other constants to tune the motor To use Vector Control Automatic Torque Boost or Automatic Energy saving the Motor Constant setting motor tuning is required Direct Access Number F402 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD dependent Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 0 Maximum 100 000 MQ Units Q
152. ction Parameters Stall This parameter sets the upper DC bus voltage threshold that once exceeded will cause an Overvoltage Stall An Overvoltage Stall increases the output frequency of the drive during deceleration for a specified time in an attempt to prevent an Overvoltage Trip If the overvoltage condition persists for over 4 mS an Overvoltage Trip will be incurred Note This feature may increase deceleration times F626 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD dependent Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 50 0 Maximum 250 0 Units Undervoltage Trip Program Protection Parameters gt Undervoltage Ridethrough This parameter Enables Disables the Undervoltage Trip function With this parameter Enabled the ASD will trip if the undervoltage condition persists for a time greater than the F628 setting A user selected contact may be actuated if so configured If Disabled the ASD will stop and not trip the FL contact is not active Settings Disabled Enabled box checked Direct Access Number F627 Parameter Type Check Box Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run No Undervoltage Detection Time Program Protection Parameters Undervoltage Ridethrough This parameter sets the time that the undervoltage condition must exist to cause an Undervoltage trip when this function is enabled at F627 HX7 ASD Programming and Op
153. cuasssaubegeehssnsseenssuteesssesnevsssacespnebesedn cenubecedocdvensendes 3 DIS POS All sa orere ves tae oo rnr EEEE E E E EE EEEE 3 Personnel Protect On sss iscisieitcescscscssdcees ct svveness geass aotrea e E E E Ea EEEa Eais i Eer 4 System Setup ReguirementS 55 sse sebcsasscocse sacs roe anr CE E E E e E E Aro EE ES 4 Operational and Maintenance Precautions s ssseseesooscsesoesooesoesosssossoesesssessoesesssesssesese 6 Semice Life MIOrmatiON s 3 scacvssesvesevaxseosuedens eves edeodiardovesesvencestacdteverssaseeavdeeuennste 6 VO and Control svicisssccrssccscsusscsoassanssscacsussansisconsses sesuestenscenedcsonscosasessesawsenassuscssscedasesbscesouseas 7 Input Control Signals and Monitoring 0 eee cee eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeceesaaesaesseesaeeneeeaeees 8 VO Terminal Descriptions see eie oere nene eere re s aE Eo EEEE E EEEE TETRIS 9 HX7 ASD CONTON ici cssissans ests eicsarecs acsstiess aavhiiesteiatieas E Oner E E AEE EEEE ea E p oia 12 CNUVI A and CNU2 2A POU teineiti dacsvcassecesseviasedecseuseseexeasesiseatedeiesinansdeapiers 13 CNI PiNOUt ossessioni ees a s E e AE Ee E Aa aE Aeae eera Erie 13 CN 7 RM OUU ss eas fsa eacect sails E E EE EE E ER 13 O Circ it Config rationS ssc scccccseessccseesceeecssessaesscssnncsesaeescneseosuessadeoceebectessensoesss 14 Typical Connection Dia stan aserre sceteesectasesnuseecsscedssdicsaze sptvsnnsnteveussergeetensucsayeds OTe 15 Startup and Test csesivsscidcccesssntveesosdsnesses
154. custom V f curves Direct Access Number F197 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 0 Maximum 100 0 Units Custom V f Five Point Setting 5 Frequency Program gt Special Control Parameters gt V f Five Point Setting The Custom V f Five Point Setting 5 Frequency sets the frequency to be associated with parameter F199 Custom V f Five Point Setting 5 Voltage See F190 for additional information on custom V f curves Direct Access Number F198 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 0 Maximum 299 Units Hz HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F199 F199 Custom V f Five Point Setting 5 Voltage Program gt Special Control Parameters gt V f Five Point Setting The Custom V f Five Point Setting 5 Voltage establishes the percentage of the output voltage that is to be associated with the frequency setting of F198 Custom V f Five Point Setting 5 Frequency See F190 for additional information on custom V f curves Direct Access Number F199 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 0 Maximum 100 0 Units Reference Priority Selection Program Fundamental Parameters gt Standard Mode Sel
155. d Operation Heavy Load Detection Time Program Special Control Parameters Crane Hoist Settings gt Express Speed Settings Light Load High Speed Operation Heavy Load Detection Time While operating in the Light Load High Speed mode this parameter determines the length of time that a load exceeding the Light Load High Speed operation criteria may exist before the Light Load High Speed mode is terminated and normal operation resumes F334 Parameter Type Numerical Direct Access Number Factory Default 5 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 10 0 Units Seconds Switching Load Torque During Forward Run Program Special Control Parameters Crane Hoist Settings gt Express Speed Settings Switching Load Torque During Forward Run While running forward this parameter establishes the threshold torque level that is used to determine if the Light Load High Speed F331 operation may engage or remain engaged if active If the Light Load High Speed operation is terminated normal operation resumes HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual F335 Parameter Type Numerical Direct Access Number Factory Default 50 Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 Maximum 250 Units 105 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F336 F340 Heavy Load Torque During Forward Acceleration Progr
156. d in volatile memory The terminal assignment information will be lost if the system is powered down or reset In addition the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This parameter sets the programmable S7 terminal to 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 5 on pg 162 Direct Access Number F121 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Unassigned Changeable During Run No Input Terminal 12 Assignment Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters Input Terminal Assignment gt 12 This parameter selects the functionality of the 12 input terminal Note The 12 input terminal may be used without the ASD Multicom option board Without the ASD Multicom option board the 12 terminal assignment information will be stored in volatile memory The terminal assignment information will be lost if the system is powered down or reset In addition the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This parameter sets the programmable terminal 12 to 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 5 on pg 162 Direct Access Number F122 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Unassigned Changeable During Run No Input Terminal 13 Assignment Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters gt Input Terminal Assignment gt 13 This parameter selects the functionality of the 13 input terminal Note The
157. d mechanical stress to loads Automatic Accel Decel and Stall settings may lengthen the acceleration time Direct Access Number F501 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 1 Maximum 6000 Units Seconds HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F502 F502 Accel Decel Pattern 1 Direct Access Number F502 Program gt Special Control Parameters gt Accel Decel 1 4 Parameter Type Selection List Settings Factory Default Linear This parameter enables a user selected preprogrammed output profile that Changeable Dunng Run Yeg controls the acceleration and deceleration pattern for the 1 Accel Decel parameter Settings Linear S Pattern 1 S Pattern 2 The figures below provide a profile of the available accel decel patterns Max Freq FH Linear acceleration and deceleration is the default pattern and is used on most oss applications 0 Eb Linear Acceleration Deceleration 4 Mox Freq CFH Freq Setting S pattern 1 is used for applications that require quick acceleration and deceleration This setting is also popular for 5 applications that require shock absorption at the start of acceleration or deceleration F009 Setting a Time St sec F507 F009
158. damage or death if safe procedures or methods are not followed as outlined in this manual Qualified Personnel Installation operation and maintenance shall be performed by Qualified Personnel Only A Qualified Person is one that has the skills and knowledge relating to the construction installation operation and maintenance of the electrical equipment and has received safety training on the hazards involved Refer to the latest edition of NFPA 70E for additional safety requirements Qualified Personnel shall e Have carefully read the entire operation manual e Be familiar with the construction and function of the HX7 ASD the equipment being driven and the hazards involved e Be able to recognize and properly address hazards associated with the application of motor driven equipment e Be trained and authorized to safely energize de energize ground lockout tagout circuits and equipment and clear faults in accordance with established safety practices e Be trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment such as safety shoes rubber gloves hard hats safety glasses face shields flash clothing etc in accordance with established safety practices e Be trained in rendering first aid For further information on workplace safety visit www osha gov 2 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Equipment Inspectio
159. dead time Maximum 327 6 Dead Time Compensation Enable Direct Access Number F489 Program gt Special Control Parameters gt Special Parameters gt Dead Parameter Type Selection List Time Compensation Factory Default Enabled This parameter Enables Disables the Dead Time Compensation function The Changeable Dunne Run Yes Dead Time Compensation feature provides a smoothing of the on off IGBT signal that feeds the Gate Driver board during the off portion of the on off cycle Settings Enabled Disabled Dead time Compensation Bias Direct Access Number F490 Program gt Special Control Parameters gt Special Parameters gt Dead Parameter Type Numerical time Compensation Bias Factory Default 0 000 This parameter sets a bias for the Dead time Compensation function The Changeable During Run Yes Dead time Compensation feature provides a smoothing of the on off IGBT Minimum 32 768 signal that feeds the Gate Driver board Maximum 32 767 Switching Frequency of Current Voltage Control Direct Access Number F491 Program gt Special Control Parameters gt Special Parameters gt Parameter Type Numerical Switching Frequency between Current and Voltage Control Factory Default 40 00 This parameter sets the threshold frequency at which ASD control is switched Changeable Dunne Run Yes between Current control and Voltage control Minimum 10 00 Maximum 60 00 Units Hz HX7 ASD Programm
160. e Selection List Factory Default Forward Changeable During Run No Preset Speed Direction 12 Program gt Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Preset Speeds Determines the forward reverse setting for the 12 Preset Speed F291 Settings Forward Reverse Direct Access Number F392 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Forward Changeable During Run No Preset Speed Direction 13 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Preset Speeds Determines the forward reverse setting for the 13 Preset Speed F292 Settings Forward Reverse Direct Access Number F393 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Forward Changeable During Run No Preset Speed Direction 14 Program gt Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Preset Speeds Determines the forward reverse setting for the 14 Preset Speed F293 Settings Forward Reverse 114 Direct Access Number F394 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Forward Changeable During Run No HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F395 F404 Preset Speed Direction 15 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Preset Speeds Determines the forward reverse setting for the 15 Preset Speed F294 Settings Forward Reverse F395 Parameter Type Sele
161. e 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F613 F617 Short Circuit Test Program Protection Parameters Arm Short Check Settings This parameter determines when the system will perform an Output Short Circuit test Settings Every Run Every Powerup Never Direct Access Number F613 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Every Run Changeable During Run No Short Circuit Test Duration Program Protection Parameters Arm Short Check Settings This parameter sets the pulse width of the ASD output pulse that is applied to the motor during an Output Short Circuit test Direct Access Number F614 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD dependent Changeable During Run No Minimum 1 Maximum 100 Units uS Overtorque Trip Program gt Protection Parameters Overtorque Parameters This parameter Enables Disables the Over Torque Tripping function When enabled the ASD trips if an output torque value greater than the setting of F616 or F617 exists for a time longer than the setting of F618 When disabled the ASD does not trip due to overtorque conditions Settings Disabled Enabled box checked Direct Access Number F615 Parameter Type Check Box Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run No Overtorque Trip Alarm Level Positive Torque Program gt Protection Parameters
162. e 2 setting has priority over Frequency Mode 1 setting Frequency Source Priority Switching allows for a preconfigured input terminal to activate Frequency Source 1 or Frequency Source 2 Any unused programmable discrete input terminal may be programmed as the Frequency Priority switching terminal HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Frequency Direct Access Number F200 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Frequency Source 1 Changeable During Run Yes Frequency Source 1 Frequency Source 2 Time Unce the commanded frequency exceeds the F208 value the setting of parameter F200 determines if the 1 or the 2 frequency command source controls the ASD output 73 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F201 F201 VI Il Speed Reference 1 Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints gt VI II This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the VI II input terminal when the VI II terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode or the Torque Control mode Direct Access Number F201 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 20 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 100 0 Note See note on pg 50 for further information on the VI II terminal VI II Input Speed Control Setup Perform the following set
163. e Point Setting Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 The Custom V f Five Point Setting 2 Frequency sets the frequency to be Ch ble Durine R N associated with parameter F193 Custom V f Five Point Setting 2 Voltage PERSE OS TULIME NUN NO See F190 for additional information on custom V f curves Mian 0 Maximum 299 Units Hz HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual 71 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F193 F198 Custom V f Five Point Setting 2 Voltage Program gt Special Control Parameters gt V f Five Point Setting The Custom V f Five Point Setting 2 Voltage establishes the percentage of the output voltage that is to be associated with the frequency setting of F192 Custom V f Five Point Setting 2 Frequency See F190 for additional information on custom V f curves Direct Access Number F193 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 0 Maximum 100 0 Units Custom V f Five Point Setting 3 Frequency Program gt Special Control Parameters gt V f Five Point Setting The Custom V f Five Point Setting 3 Frequency sets the frequency to be associated with parameter F195 Custom V f Five Point Setting 3 Voltage See F190 for additional information on custom V f curves Direct Access Number F194 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default
164. e input voltage of the ASD and the Supply Voltage Compensation setting F307 This parameter is used only when the parameters for motor set 4 are configured and selected Motor set 4 may be selected by a properly configured input terminal Direct Access Number F179 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 600 0 Units Volts Motor 4 Torque Boost Program Motor Parameters gt Motor Set 4 The Motor 4 Torque Boost function is used to increase the low frequency torque for high inertia loads by increasing the output voltage at frequencies below 1 2 of the 4 Base Frequency setting F178 See parameter F016 Motor 1 Torque Boost for an explanation of torque boost This parameter is used only when the parameters for motor set 4 are configured and selected Motor set 4 may be selected by a properly configured input terminal Direct Access Number F180 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 30 0 Units Electronic Thermal Protection 4 Program Motor Parameters gt Motor Set 4 The Motor 4 Electronic Thermal Protection parameter specifies the motor overload current level for motor set 4 This value is entered as either a percentage of the full load rating of the ASD or as the FLA of the motor The unit of measurement fo
165. e motor unexpectedly A familiarity with the Auto restart settings are a requirement to use this product There may be thermal or physical properties or ancillary devices integrated into the overall system that may allow for the HX7 ASD to start the motor without warning Signs at the equipment installation must be posted to this effect Power factor improvement correction capacitors or surge absorbers MUST NOT be installed on the output of the HX7 ASD Use of the built in system protective features is highly recommended i e E Off Overload Protection etc The operating controls and system status indicators should be clearly readable and positioned where the operator can see them without obstruction HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net e Additional warnings and notifications shall be posted at the equipment installation location as deemed required by Qualified Personnel e Follow all warnings and precautions and do not exceed equipment ratings A CAUTION e Ifa secondary magnetic contactor MC or an ASD output disconnect is used between the HX7 ASD and the load it should be interlocked to halt the HX7 ASD before the secondary contact opens If the output contactor is used for bypass operation it must be interlocked such that commercial power is never applied to the HX7 ASD output terminals U V W e When using an ASD
166. e running and green while stopped A Run command issued from the EOI while in the Remote mode will be activated once the Local mode is selected the motor will run at the commanded speed EOI Operation The EOL is the primary input output device for the user The EOI may be used to monitor system functions input data into the system or perform diagnostics Note The Up Down arrow keys and the Enter key may be used to perform the functions of the Rotary Encoder The Rotary Encoder will be used in this explanation and throughout this manual for the Up Down and Enter key functions The software used with the HX7 ASD is menu driven thus making it a select and click environment The operating parameters of a motor may be selected and viewed or changed using the EOI To change a parameter setting go to the Program mode by pressing the MON PRG key until the Program menu is displayed Turn the Rotary Encoder until the desired parameter group is within the cursor block Press the Rotary Encoder repeat if there is a submenu The selection will take on the reverse video format dark background light text Turn the Rotary Encoder to change the value of the parameter Press the ESC key while the display is in the reverse video mode to exit the menu without saving the change or press the Rotary Encoder to accept the new setting Repeated ESC key entries takes the menu back one level each time the ESC key is pressed until the root level is reached
167. e the section titled Cable Terminal Specifications on pg 185 for the HX7 ASD conductor and terminal electrical specifications ST The default setting for this terminal is the Standby mode controller As the default setting this terminal must be activated for normal system operation The ST terminal is activated by connecting CC to this terminal Sink mode When deactivated OFF is displayed at the EOI screen This input terminal may be programmed to any of the functions that are listed in Table 6 on page 170 see F113 RES The default setting for this terminal is Reset The RES terminal is activated by connecting CC to this terminal Sink mode A momentary connection to CC resets the ASD and any fault indications from the display Reset is effective when faulted only This input terminal may be programmed to any of the functions that are listed in Table 6 on page 170 see F114 F The default setting for this terminal is Forward run command The F terminal is activated by connecting CC to this terminal Sink mode This input terminal may be programmed to any of the functions that are listed in Table 6 on page 170 see F111 R The default setting for this terminal is Reverse run command The R terminal is activated by connecting CC to this terminal Sink mode This input terminal may be programmed to any of the functions that are listed in Table 6 on page 170 see F112 S1 The default setting for this terminal is Preset Sp
168. e trip displayed will remain until all faults are corrected and all trips are cleared HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual 175 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Viewing Trip Information In the event that the condition causing an Alarm does not return to the normal operating level within a specified time a Trip is incurred When a trip occurs the resultant error information may be viewed either from the Trip History screen Program System Information and Setup gt Trip History or from the Monitor screen Trip History The Trip History screen records the system parameters for up to 24 trips The recorded trips are numbered from zero to 23 Once the Trip History record reaches trip number 23 the oldest recorded trip will be deleted with each new record stored first in first out The Trip field may be selected and scrolled through to view the recorded trip information for a given trip number The monitored parameters are listed in Table 11 as At trip Recorded Parameters parameter readings at the time that the trip occurred Table 11 Trip History Record Parameters At trip Recorded Parameters 1 Trip Number 9 Bus Voltage 17 Torque Reference 25 ASD Load 2 Trip Type 10 Discrete Input Status 18 Torque Current 26 DBR Load 3 Time and Date 11 OUT1 OUT2 FL Status 19 Excitation Current 27 Input Power 4 Frequency at Trip 12 Timer
169. ection gt Reference Priority Selection Either Frequency Mode 1 or Frequency Mode 2 may control the output frequency of the ASD This parameter determines which of the two will control the output frequency and the conditions in which control will be switched from one to the other Settings Frequency Source 1 Frequency Source 2 Frequency Source 1 Priority Frequency Source 2 Priority Frequency Source Priority Switching The Frequency Source 1 or 2 setting specifies the source of the input frequency command signal These settings are performed in F004 and F207 respectively If Frequency Source 1 is selected here the ASD will follow the settings of F004 If Frequency Source 2 is selected here the ASD will follow the settings of F207 The Frequency Source 1 Priority and Frequency Source 2 Priority selections are used in conjunction with the Mode 1 2 Switching Frequency setting F208 Parameter F208 establishes a threshold frequency that will be used as a reference when determining when to switch output control between the Frequency Mode 1 setting and the Frequency Mode 2 setting If Frequency Source 1 Priority is selected here and the commanded frequency of Frequency Source 1exceeds the F208 setting the Frequency Mode 1 setting has priority over the Frequency Mode 2 setting If Frequency Source 2 Priority is selected here and the commanded frequency of Frequency Source 2 exceeds the F208 setting the Frequency Mod
170. ed F323 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 10 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 100 0 Units Drooping Output Filter Program Feedback Parameters gt Drooping Control This parameter is used to set the rate of output change allowed while operating in the Drooping Control mode Jerky operation may be decreased by increasing this setting HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual F324 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 0 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 1 Maximum 200 0 103 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F325 F330 Load Inertia Acc Dec Torque Program gt Feedback Parameters Drooping Control gt Load Inertia This parameter is used for calculating accel decel torque when compensating for load inertia while operating in the Drooping Control mode F325 Parameter Type Numerical Direct Access Number Factory Default 1 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 1000 0 Load Torque Filter Acc Dec Torque Program gt Feedback Parameters Drooping Control gt Load Inertia This parameter is used to set the response sensitivity when calculating the accel decel torque This setting applies to load inertia compensation while operating in the Droopin
171. ed Reference 1 while operating in the Speed Control mode See BIN Speed Reference 1 F228 for further information on this setting F231 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 80 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum Max Freq F011 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz BIN Torque Reference Setpoint 1 Program Torque Setting Parameters gt Setpoints gt BIN This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the binary input when the discrete input terminals are used as the control input while operating in the Torque Control mode This is accomplished by establishing an associated V f output pattern for a given binary input signal See BIN Speed Reference 1 for further information on this setting This parameter sets BIN Torque Reference Setpoint 1 and is the output torque value that is associated with the setting of BIN Speed Reference 1 while operating in the Torque control mode F232 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 250 0 Maximum 250 0 Units HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F233 F234 BIN Torque Reference Setpoint 2 Program Torque Setting Parameters gt Setpoints gt BIN This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of
172. ed once while in the Local mode issues the Off command and stops the motor at the programmed deceleration rate If pressed twice in rapid succession either initiates an Emergency Off or resets the ASD if faulted HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual 17 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Local Remote Key Toggles the system to and from the Local and Remote modes The LED is on when the system is in the Local Command mode The Local Command mode enables the Command and Frequency control functions to be carried out via the EOI The Remote mode enables the Command and Frequency control functions to be carried out via any one of the following methods e F003 F004 settings e Pulse Input e Motorized Pot e Communication Card e RS232 RS485 e Common TTL e Binary BCD e LED Keypad e Option Card RX2 e RX e RR or e VII The input channel selection may be made via Program gt Utilities gt CMD FRQ amp Carrier MON PRG Key Monitor Program Provides a means to access the three root menus Pressing the MON PRG key repeatedly loops the system through the three root menus see Figure 20 on pg 37 While looping through the root menus the Program menu will display the last menu screen or sub menu item being accessed at the time that the MON PRG key was pressed Run Key Issues the Run command while in the Local mode The Run LED is red whil
173. eed 1 see Preset Speed 1 on pg 60 The S1 terminal is activated by connecting CC to this terminal Sink mode This input terminal may be programmed to any of the functions that are listed in Table 6 on page 170 see F115 S2 The default setting for this terminal is Preset Speed 2 see Preset Speed 2 on pg 60 The S2 terminal is activated by connecting CC to this terminal Sink mode This input terminal may be programmed to any of the functions that are listed in Table 6 on page 170 see F116 S3 The default setting for this terminal is Preset Speed 3 see Preset Speed 3 on pg 61 The S3 terminal is activated by connecting CC to this terminal Sink mode This input terminal may be programmed to any of the functions that are listed in Table 6 on page 170 see F117 S4 The default setting for this terminal is Emergency Off normally closed The Emergency Off terminal is activated by opening the connection to CC Sink mode The function of this input as Emergency Off is to remove power from the output of the ASD and may apply a supplemental braking system using the method selected at F603 This input terminal may be programmed to any of the functions that are listed in Table 6 on page 170 see F118 RR The Frequency Mode 1 function is assigned to this terminal The RR terminal accepts a 0 10 VDC input signal and may be programmed to control the speed or torque of the motor This input terminal setting may be fixed or the
174. eed Frequency 1 and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of PG Speed Reference 1 while operating in the Speed Control mode F235 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum Max Freq F011 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz PG Speed Reference 2 Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints gt PG This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the PG input terminal when a shaft mounted encoder is used as the feedback transducer while operating in the Speed Control mode See PG Speed Reference 1 for further information on this setting when used for Speed control This parameter sets the PG input level that is associated with PG Speed Frequency 2 while operating in the Speed control mode F236 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 100 0 Maximum 100 0 Units PG Speed Frequency 2 Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints gt PG This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the PG input terminal when a shaft mounted encoder is used as the feedback transducer while operating in the Speed Control mode See PG Speed Reference 1 for further information on this setting when used for Speed control This parameter sets PG Speed Frequency 2 and is the
175. eed position switching Note For proper operation the carrier frequency must be 2 2 kHz or above except while operating in the Constant Torque Variable Torque or the 5 Point Setting modes The Automatic Torque Boost and the Sensorless Vector Control selections use the motor tuning parameters of the drive to properly configure the ASD for the motor being used If Load Reactors or Long Lead Filters are used or if the capacity of the ASD is greater than the motor manual tuning of the motor parameters may be required for optimum performance Direct Access Number F015 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Constant Torque Changeable During Run No 50 Motor 1 Torque Boost Program gt Fundamental Parameters gt Motor Set 1 The Motor 1 Torque Boost function is used to increase the low frequency torque for high inertia loads by increasing the output voltage at frequencies below 1 2 of the 1 Base Frequency F014 setting The value programmed as a boost percentage establishes an output voltage vs output frequency relationship to be used to start the motor or to provide smoother operation Base Frequency Voltage Base Frequency Output Voltage Percent Torque Boost Output Frequency Note Setting an excessive Torque Boost level may cause nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads F016 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD dependent Direct Acc
176. eedback Source Delay Filter Program gt Feedback Parameters gt Feedback Settings This parameter determines the delay in the ASD output response to the motor control feedback signal signal source is selected at F360 108 Direct Access Number F361 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 255 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F362 F367 Proportional P Gain Direct Access Number F362 Program Feedback Parameters gt Feedback Settings Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 10 This parameter determines the degree that the Proportional function affects the Ch ble During R XY output signal The larger the value entered here the quicker the drive responds UR e ain nee ERES to changes in feedback Minimum 0 01 Maximum 100 0 Integral I Gain Direct Access Number F363 Program Feedback Parameters gt Feedback Settings Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 10 This parameter determines the degree that the Integral function affects the Ch ble Durine R xe output signal The smaller the value here the more pronounced the effect of the PIECA TEDE nr ee integral function on the output signal Minimum 0 01 Maximum 100 0 Upper Deviation Limits Direct Access Number F364 Program Feedback Pa
177. efault RCH Specified Speed Changeable During Run No OUT7 Terminal Assignment Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters Output Terminal Assignment gt 7 This parameter sets the functionality of the OUT7 terminals to 1 of the 62 possible functions that are listed in Table 7 on pg 167 The on and off delay times of the OUT7 terminals may be adjusted to provide more response time to the device that is connected to the output terminals In addition the output terminals must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed Direct Access Number F136 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Overcurrent Prealarm Changeable During Run No F Input Terminal Delay Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters gt Input Terminal Delays gt F This parameter delays the response of the ASD to any change in the F terminal input by the programmed value Input Terminal Delay Time Input Terminal G7 Response The delay may be increased to provide additional electrical noise immunity or to prevent the ASD from responding to contact bounce or chatter HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F140 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 8 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 2 0 Maximum 200 0 Units mS 63 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F141 F145 R
178. election F660 Override Control Multiplying Input Selection F661 LED Option Override Multiplication Gain F729 PaTTERN RUN Pattern Run Pattern Run Mode Enable Disable and Restart F520 CONTROL PARAMETERS fini sla Pattern 1 Speeds F530 Pattern 2 Speeds F540 Speeds Pattern 3 Speeds F550 Pattern 4 Speeds F560 1 Frequency amp Characteristics F018 2 Frequency amp Characteristics F019 3 Frequency amp Characteristics F020 4 Frequency amp Characteristics F021 5 Frequency amp Characteristics F022 6 Frequency amp Characteristics F023 7 Frequency amp Characteristics F024 Preset Speeds 8 Frequency amp Characteristics F287 9 Frequency amp Characteristics F288 10 Frequency amp Characteristics F289 11 Frequency amp Characteristics F290 12 Frequency amp Characteristics F291 13 Frequency amp Characteristics F292 14 Frequency amp Characteristics F293 15 Frequency amp Characteristics F294 Preset Speed Mode Use Preset Speed Enable Disable F380 COMMUNICATION Communication Settings ASD Number F802 SETTING PARAMETERS HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual 39 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Program Menu Navigation Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name pclae COMMUNICATION TTL Baud Rate F800 SETTING PARAMETERS
179. ency amp Characteristics F292 14 Frequency amp Characteristics F293 15 Frequency amp Characteristics F294 Preset Speed Mode Use Preset Speed Mode Enable Disable F380 Fwd Rev Disable Disable Forward Run Disable Reverse Run F311 Motorized Pot Setting Disposition at Power F108 Down Motorized Pot Settings a Minimum Frequency N A Maximum Frequency PROTECTION D Dynamic Braking Enable Disable F304 ynamic Braking Dynamic Braking Resistance Capacit F309 PARAMETERS Not used with this system _ see 3 Dynamic Braking Resistance F308 Over current Stall Level F601 Over voltage Stall Enable Disable F305 Over voltage Stall Level F626 Stall Over voltage Stall Level Fast F625 Continuing Stall Period During Positive F452 Torque Speed Stall Prevention During Regeneration F454 DC Injection Start Frequency F250 DC Injection Braking Current F251 DC Injection Braking DC Injection Braking Time F252 Motor Shaft Fixing Control F253 Motor Shaft Stationary Control Enable Disable F254 Emergency Off Mode Setting F603 DC Injection Braking Ti F604 Emergency Off Settings Stone anaes Emergency Off Activation of the FL Output N A Enable Disable Number of Retries F303 Retry Restart Restart Conditions F301 Configuration Scan Rate F312 Lock on Rate F313 36 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net
180. ency Priority Connecting this terminal to CC allows for the frequency control to be switched from the frequency command source selected as Frequency Mode 1 to Frequency Mode 2 This function is enabled by setting the Reference Priority Selection to Frequency Source Priority Switching and is located at Program gt Fundamental Parameters gt Standard Mode Selection gt Reference Priority Selection gt Frequency Source Priority Switching 53 VI II Terminal Priority Connecting this terminal to CC assigns command control to the VI I Terminal and overrides all other Control Terminal Strip input so long as the Command Mode is set to Use Control Terminal Strip 54 Command Control Terminal Strip Priority Connecting this terminal to CC overrides the FMOD setting and assigns speed control to the Control Terminal Strip 55 Parameter Editing Enabling LED The LED Keypad system is unavailable at the time of this release 56 Control Switch torque position This function allows for a system change from speed to torque or position as a function of the V f setting when connected to CC 57 Deviation Counter Clear This function clears the Deviation Counter while operating in the Position Control mode 58 Position Control Forward Limit LS Connecting this terminal to CC will immediately stop the drive and hold its position If the connection remains the drive will time out and trip This f
181. entified as Preset Speed 14 The binary number is applied to S1 S4 of the Control Terminal Strip to output the Preset Speed see F018 for further information on this parameter Direct Access Number F293 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum Lower Limit F013 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz Preset Speed 15 Program Pattern Run Control gt Preset Speeds gt 15 This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 1111 and is identified as Preset Speed 15 The binary number is applied to S1 S4 of the Control Terminal Strip to output the Preset Speed see F018 for further information on this parameter HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F294 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum Lower Limit F013 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz 97 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F300 F301 PWM Carrier Frequency Program Special Control Parameters gt Carrier Frequency This parameter sets the frequency of the pulse width modulation signal applied to the motor Note The carrier frequency must be 2 2 kHz or above except while operating in the Constant Torque Variable Torque or the 5 Point Setting modes Note the following ASDs 230 volt gt 75
182. enu These features combined with Toshiba s high performance software delivers unparalleled motor control and reliability The HX7 ASD is a very powerful tool yet surprisingly simple to operate The user friendly easy to read 240 x 64 pixel graphical LCD screen of the Electronic Operator Interface EOI provides quick access to the many monitoring and programming features of the HX7 ASD The motor control software is menu driven which allows for easy access to the motor control parameters and quick changes when required To maximize the abilities of your new HX7 ASD a working familiarity with this manual will be required This manual has been prepared for the HX7 ASD installer operator and maintenance personnel This manual may also be used as a reference guide or for training With this in mind use this manual to develop a system familiarity before attempting to install or operate the device The HX7 ASD is truly Reliability in motion Important Notice The instructions contained in this manual are not intended to cover all details or variations in equipment types Nor may it provide for every possible contingency concerning the installation operation or maintenance of this equipment Should additional information be required contact your Toshiba representative The contents of this manual shall not become a part of or modify any prior or existing agreement commitment or relationship The sales contract contains the entire obligati
183. eration 106 Heavy Load Torque During Forward Deceleration 106 Heavy Load Torque During Reverse Acceleration 106 Heavy Load Torque During Reverse Deceleration 106 Hz Per User defined Unit 153 I O and Control 7 T O Circuit Configurations 14 ICCDESIGNS 12 II 10 Important Notice 4 In put Phase Loss 173 Input Power 31 Input Special Functions 34 Input Terminal 12 Assignment 60 Input Terminal 13 Assignment 60 Input Terminal 14 Assignment 61 Input Terminal 15 Assignment 61 Input Terminal 16 Assignment 61 Input Terminal Assignment 34 Input Terminal Delays 35 Input Terminal Priority 56 Input Terminals 30 Inrush Current Suppression 144 Integral I Gain 109 Interlock with ST 144 Introduction 4 Inverter ASD OL 172 J Jog Run Frequency 94 Jog Settings 35 Jog Setup Using the Control Terminal Strip 94 Jog Setup Using the EOI 94 Jog Stop Control 95 Jump Frequencies 42 Jump Frequency 1 95 Jump Frequency 1 Bandwidth 95 Jump Frequency 2 95 Jump Frequency 2 Bandwidth 95 Jump Frequency 3 96 Jump Frequency 3 Bandwidth 96 Jump Frequency Processing 96 180 L LCD Display 17 LCD Port Connection 40 LED Option Override Multiplication Gain 155 Light Load High Speed Operation Heavy Load Detection Time 105 Light Load High Speed Operation Load Detection Time 105 Light Load High Speed Operation Load Wait Time 105 Light load High speed Operation Selection 104 Light L
184. eration Manual F628 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 03 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 00 Maximum 10 00 Units Seconds 147 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F629 F640 Undervoltage Stall level Program Protection Parameters Undervoltage Ridethrough This parameter sets the low end of the DC bus voltage threshold that once it drops below this setting will activate the setting of F302 Ridethrough Mode Activation may be the result of a momentary power loss or an excessive load on the bus voltage Once activated the system will attempt to maintain the bus voltage level set here until the motor stops Note This feature may decrease deceleration times Direct Access Number F629 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 50 00 Maximum 100 0 Units Brake Trouble Internal Timer Program Protection Parameters gt Brake Fault Timer This parameter is used in conjunction with the discrete input terminal setting 64 System Consistent Sequence BA braking answer see item 64 of Table 5 on pg 162 for further information on this feature After activating the discrete input terminal System Consistent Sequence B braking release the setting of this parameter defines a window of time in which 1 a Br
185. eration Manual ii Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net General Safety Information DO NOT attempt to operate program perform maintenance or dispose of this equipment until you have read and understood all of the product safety information and directions that are contained in this manual and those of the W7 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Safety Alert Symbol The Safety Alert Symbol indicates that a potential personal injury hazard exists The symbol is comprised of an equilateral triangle enclosing an exclamation mark A Signal Words Listed below are the signal words that are used throughout this manual followed by their descriptions and associated symbols When the words DANGER WARNING and CAUTION are used in this manual they will be followed by important safety information that must be carefully adhered to The word DANGER preceded by the safety alert symbol indicates that an imminently hazardous situation exists that if not avoided will result serious injury to personnel or loss of life A DANGER The word WARNING preceded by the safety alert symbol indicates that a potentially hazardous situation exists that if not avoided could result in serious injury to personnel or loss of life A WARNING The word CAUTION preceded by the safety alert symbol indicates that a potentially hazardous situation exists which if not avoided may result in minor or moder
186. erence 1 while operating in the Speed Control mode Direct Access Number F217 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum Max Freq F011 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz RX Speed Reference 2 Program gt Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints gt RX This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX input terminal when the RX terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode or the Torque Control mode See RX Speed Reference 1 for further information on this setting when used for Speed control or Torque control This parameter sets the RX input level that is associated with RX Speed Frequency 2 while operating in the Speed control mode or is associated with the RX Torque Reference Setpoint 2 while operating in the Torque control mode F218 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 100 0 Maximum 100 0 Units RX Speed Frequency 2 Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints gt RX This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX input terminal when the RX terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode See RX Speed Reference 1 for further information on this setting when used for Speed control This parameter sets RX
187. erminal to of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 5 on pg 162 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F112 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Reverse Changeable During Run No 57 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F113 F117 ST Input Terminal Assignment Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters gt Input Terminal Assignment gt ST This parameter selects the functionality of the ST input terminal In addition the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This parameter sets the programmable ST terminal to 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 5 on pg 162 Direct Access Number F113 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Standby Changeable During Run No RES Input Terminal Assignment Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters gt Input Terminal Assignment gt RES This parameter selects the functionality of the RES input terminal In addition the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This parameter sets the programmable RES terminal to 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 5 on pg 162 Direct Access Number F114 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Reset Changeable During Run No S1 Input Terminal Assignment Pro
188. ess Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 30 0 Units HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F017 F017 Soft Stall Direct Access Number F017 Program gt Protection Parameters gt Overload Parameter Type Check Box Factory Default Disabled This parameter Enables Disables the Soft Stall function When enabled the Soft Stall function reduces the output frequency of the ASD when the current requirements of the motor exceed the Electronic Thermal Protection 1 setting F600 thus reducing the output current Changeable During Run No If the current drops below the motor overload protection level setting within a specified time the output of the ASD will accelerate to the programmed frequency setpoint If not a trip will be incurred The Soft Stall feature is available when the Program gt Protection Parameters gt Overload gt Motor Overload Trip Enable Disable parameter is enabled only Soft Stall is highly effective in preventing motor overload trips when used on fans blowers pumps and other centrifugal loads which require less torque at lower frequencies Note The Soft Stall setting may affect acceleration times and patterns Settings Disabled Enabled box checked HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual 51 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723
189. f any of the listed items are in the Override mode For each scan cycle the command registers of the control sources are scanned for the Override setting in the order that they are listed in Table 3 The first item of the Command section and the first item of the Frequency section detected as being in the Override mode will be used for Command and Frequency control respectively If no items are detected as being in the Override mode the settings of F003 and F004 will be used for Command and Frequency control respectively Any or all of the Command and Frequency control input sources may be placed in the Override mode Placing the HX7 ASD in the Local mode Local Remote LED on via the EOI places the RS232 RS485 or the Common Serial TTL control selections in the Override mode for Command and Frequency input see the section titled Override Operation below for the proper setting The Local Remote control Override feature for Command and Frequency or either may be enabled disabled at Program EOI Option Setups gt Local Remote Key enabled with check in box Communications may be used to place the remaining Command and eligible Frequency control input sources in the Override mode Once placed in the Override mode this setting is valid until it is cancelled the power supply is turned off or the unit is reset 26 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info cti
190. ference 1 F234 the input pulse count rate that represents PG Speed Frequency 1 Set PG Speed Frequency 1 F235 e Set PG Speed Reference 2 F236 the input pulse count rate that represents PG Speed Frequency 2 e Set PG Speed Frequency 2 F237 Provide a Run command F and or R Once set as the PG pulse count rate changes the output frequency of the ASD will vary in accordance with the above settings This parameter sets PG Speed Reference 1 and is the input pulse count rate that is associated with the setting of PG Speed Frequency 1 while operating in the Speed Control mode HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual F234 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 100 0 Maximum 100 0 Units Frequency Settings i Dutput Frequency F235 F237 1 Hz PG Speed Frequency 2 Hz 89 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F235 F240 PG Speed Frequency 1 Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints gt PG This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the PG input terminal when a shaft mounted encoder is used as the feedback transducer while operating in the Speed Control mode See PG Speed Reference 1 F234 for further information on this setting This parameter sets PG Sp
191. g the frequency setting here F331 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 40 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 30 0 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz Light Load High Speed Operation Load Wait Time Program gt Special Control Parameters Crane Hoist Settings gt Express Speed Settings Light Load High Speed Operation Load Wait Time After the time setting of F333 times out this parameter determines the length of time that the Light Load High Speed criteria must be met until the Light Load High Speed function engages F332 Parameter Type Numerical Direct Access Number Factory Default 1 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 10 0 Units Seconds Light Load High Speed Operation Load Detection Time Program gt Special Control Parameters Crane Hoist Settings gt Express Speed Settings Light Load High Speed Operation Load Detection Time This parameter determines the length of time that the load requirement must meet the Light Load High Speed criteria before the Light Load High Speed Enable F330 is recognized Once recognized the timer setting of F332 must expire to engage the Light Load High Speed function Direct Access Number F333 Parameter Type Yes Factory Default 1 0 Changeable During Run Numerical Minimum 0 0 Maximum 10 0 Units Seconds Light Load High Spee
192. g Control mode This parameter should be gradually adjusted to provide smoother Drooping Control operation while operating with heavy loads F326 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 200 0 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 200 0 Drooping Reference Program Feedback Parameters Drooping Control gt Drooping Reference This parameter sets the method to be used in determining the output torque while operating in the Drooping Control mode Settings Total Torque Calculated by the Detection Current Torque without Acc Dec Torque Calculated by Detection Current Total Torque Calculated by the Command Current Torque without Acc Dec Torque Calculated by the Command Current F327 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default Total torque calculated by the detection current Changeable During Run Yes Light load High speed Operation Selection Program gt Special Control Parameters Crane Hoist Settings gt Express Speed Settings Light Load High Speed Operation This parameter enables the Light Load High Speed function by selecting an operating mode The Light Load High Speed function accelerates the output frequency of the ASD from the programmed speed to the setting established in F341 This parameter may be disabled If either of the other selections are made and configured and after the criteria of
193. gnitude of the AM FM output signal at full scale is selection specific and may be adjusted see F671 and F006 to fit application specific requirements Table 6 shows the default full scale output setting of the AM FM terminal for each selection The column on the right side of Table 6 shows the actual AM FM output for an EOI display of 100 default setting Table 6 Output terminal selections for the AM FM FP and Analog 1 amp 2 terminals Function AM FM Output Value at 100 EOI Displayed Output Output Frequency FM and FP default setting Frequency Reference Maximum Frequency Output Current AM default setting DC Bus Voltage Output Voltage Analog 1 default setting 150 Post compensation Frequency Analog 2 default setting Speed Feedback realtime Speed Feedback 1 sec filter Maximum Frequency Torque Torque Command Internal Torque Base Torque Current Excitation Current 150 PID Feedback Value Maximum Frequency Motor Overload Ratio Motor Overload Trip Point Setting ASD Overload Ratio ASD Overload Trip Point Setting PBR DBR Overload Ratio Not used DBR Overload Trip Point Setting Not used PBR DBR Load Ratio Maximum DBR Duty Cycle Input Power Output Power 1 73 input voltage ASD rated current Peak Output Current Peak DC Bus Voltage 150 PG Counter Position Pulse
194. gram gt Terminal Selection Parameters Input Terminal Assignment gt S1 This parameter selects the functionality of the S1 input terminal In addition the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This parameter sets the programmable S1 terminal to 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 5 on pg 162 Direct Access Number F115 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Preset Speed Cmd 1 Changeable During Run No S2 Input Terminal Assignment Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters Input Terminal Assignment gt S2 This parameter selects the functionality of the S2 input terminal In addition the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This parameter sets the programmable S2 terminal to 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 5 on pg 162 Direct Access Number F116 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Preset Speed Cmd 2 Changeable During Run No S3 Input Terminal Assignment Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters Input Terminal Assignment gt S3 This parameter selects the functionality of the S3 input terminal In addition the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This parameter sets the programmable S3 terminal to 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 5 on pg 162 Direct Access Number F117 Parameter T
195. haracteristics Pattern Run Program Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Preset Speeds gt 8 Same as 1 Pattern Characteristics see F570 Direct Access Number F577 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Time From Start Changeable During Run No Pattern 9 Characteristics Pattern Run Program Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Preset Speeds gt 9 Same as 1 Pattern Characteristics see F570 138 Direct Access Number F578 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Time From Start Changeable During Run No HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F579 F586 Pattern 10 Characteristics Pattern Run Program gt Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Preset Speeds gt 10 Same as 1 Pattern Characteristics see F570 Direct Access Number F579 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Time From Start Changeable During Run No Pattern 11 Characteristics Pattern Run Program Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Preset Speeds gt 11 Same as 1 Pattern Characteristics see F570 Direct Access Number F580 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Time From Start Changeable During Run No Pattern 12 Characteristics Pattern Run Program Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Preset Speeds gt
196. he Torque control mode HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F205 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 250 0 Units 75 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F206 F208 VI Il Torque Reference Setpoint 2 Program gt Torque Setting Parameters gt Setpoints gt VIII This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the VI II input terminal when the VI II terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Torque Control mode This is accomplished by establishing an associated V f output pattern for a given VI II input level See VI II Speed Reference 1 for further information on this setting This parameter sets VI II Torque Reference Setpoint 2 and is the output torque value that is associated with setting of VI II Speed Reference 2 while operating in the Torque control mode Direct Access Number F206 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 250 0 Units Frequency Mode 2 Program gt Fundamental Parameters gt Standard Mode Selection This parameter selects the source of the frequency command signal to be used as Frequency Mode 2 in the event that Frequency Mode 1 is disabled or if Frequency Mode 2 is set up as the primary control
197. his selection allows the user to establish the source of the Run commands e g F R Stop etc Settings Use Control Terminal Strip Use LED Keypad Option Use Common Serial TTL Use RS232 RS485 U se Communication Card Frequency Reference Source This selection allows the user to establish the source of the Frequency speed command Settings Use VI II Use RR Use RX Use Option Card RX2 Use LED Keypad Option Use Binary BCD Input Use Common Serial TTL Use RS232 RS485 Use Communication Card U se Motorized Pot Simulation Use Pulse Input Option Wizard Finish This screen is the final screen of the Startup Wizard The basic parameters of the HX7 ASD have been set Click Finish to return to the Program mode Additional application specific programming may be required HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Wizard Command Source Where will your run stop and other commands come from Use terminal block Wizard Frequency Source Where will your frequency reference come from Wizard Finished Wizard is done Other parameters may need adjustment for proper operation Always read instruction manual to ensure proper setup 23 Command Mode and Frequency Mode Control Command control includes instructions such as Stop Run Jog etc The source of the Command signal must
198. iba s Marketing Department for information on this parameter Settings Driving Regen Positive Negative 122 Direct Access Number F450 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Driving Regen Changeable During Run No HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F451 F470 Torque Limit Mode Speed Dependent Program gt Torque Setting Parameters gt Torque Limit Settings gt Torque Limit Mode Speed Dependent This parameter allows for either wide or very limited speed fluctuations while operating in the Torque Control mode The ASD output follows the commanded speed when No Speed Cooperation is selected and has a very limited speed fluctuation range when Standard is selected Settings Standard No Speed Cooperation Direct Access Number F451 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Standard Changeable During Run Yes Continued Stall Until Trip During Power Operation Program gt Protection Parameters gt Stall gt Continuing Stall Period This parameter allows the user to extend the Overvoltage Stall F305 and the Overcurrent Stall F017 time settings Direct Access Number F452 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 1 00 Units Seconds Stall Prevention During Regenerat
199. il info ctiautomation net F150 F153 OUT1 On Delay Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters Output Terminal Delays OUT1 Once the condition is met to close the OUT1 A amp C output terminals this parameter delays the closing of the terminals by the programmed value For example if the OUT1 function is programmed as Overtorque Alarm OUT1 will close 2 0 mS the default value for OUT1 On Delay after the overtorque condition occurs The delay may be increased to prevent relay chatter n Condition is Met a ho Contacts Close n Delay Time Direct Access Number F150 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 2 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 2 0 Maximum 200 0 Units mS OUT2 On Delay Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters Output Terminal Delays gt OUT2 This parameter delays the closing of the OUT2 A amp C output terminals by the programmed value see waveforms at F150 The delay may be increased to prevent relay chatter Direct Access Number F151 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 2 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 2 0 Maximum 200 0 Units mS FL On Delay Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters Output Terminal Delays gt FL This parameter delays the closing of the FL output terminals by the programmed value see waveforms at F150 The delay may be increased to p
200. ill have a great effect while an increased value will have a lesser effect Direct Access Number F421 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 200 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 10 0 Maximum 200 0 Synchronized Torque Bias Input Program Torque Setting Parameters gt Torque Control This parameter Enables Disables the Synchronized Torque Bias input function When enabled this parameter identifies the source of the Synchronized Torque Bias input signal Settings Disabled VIAL RR RX RX2 option LED Keypad Option Binary BCD Input Common Serial TTL RS232 RS485 Communication Card HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F422 Parameter Type Selection list Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run Yes 117 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F423 F425 Tension Torque Bias Input Direct Access Number F423 Program gt Torque Setting Parameters gt Torque Control Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled This parameter Enables Disables the Tension Torque Bias input function and identifies the source of the Tension Torque Bias input signal when enabled Changeable During Run Yes Settings Disabled VII RR RX RX2 option LED Keypad Option Binary BCD Input Common Serial TTL RS232 RS485 Communication Card Load Sharing
201. imum 0 0 Table 7 on pg 167 for the available output assignments Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz Speed Reach Frequency Tolerance Direct Access Number F102 Program Terminal Selection Parameters gt Reach Settings Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 2 5 This parameter sets the bandwidth of the Speed Reach Frequency F101 setting Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz 54 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F103 F105 ST Signal Selection Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters gt Input Special Functions This parameter is used to set the operation of the Standby ST control terminal or any terminal configured as the ST terminal Settings ST to CC Required ST to CC Not Required Interlock with F R Terminal The setting ST to CC Required enables the ASD for operation so long as the control terminal ST is connected to CC via a jumper contact or other means Jo Dutput ST Off ST Pe FW po ST F The ST to CC Not Required setting allows the ASD to operate without the ST to CC connection The control terminal ST may be configured for other functions The Interlock with F R Terminal setting configures the F Forward and R Reverse control terminals for the secondary function of Sta
202. ing and Operation Manual 127 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F500 F501 Accel 2 Time Program gt Special Control Parameters gt 1 4 Settings This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the drive to go from 0 0 Hz to the Maximum Frequency for the 2 Acceleration profile The accel decel pattern may be set using F502 The minimum accel decel time may be set using F508 This setting is also used to determine the acceleration rate of the Motorized Pot function Note An acceleration time shorter than the load will allow may cause nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads Automatic Accel Decel and Stall settings may lengthen the acceleration time Direct Access Number F500 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 1 Maximum 6000 Units Seconds 128 Decel 2 Time Program gt Special Control Parameters Accel Decel 1 4 Settings This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the drive to go from the Maximum Frequency to 0 0 Hz for the 2 Deceleration profile The accel decel pattern may be set using F502 The minimum accel decel time may be set using F508 This setting is also used to determine the deceleration rate of the Motorized Pot function Note A deceleration time shorter than the load will allow may cause nuisance tripping an
203. ion Program Protection Parameters Stall gt Stall Prevention During Regeneration This parameter Enables Disables the Overvoltage Stall F305 and the Overcurrent Stall F017 function during regeneration only Application specific conditions may occur that warrant disabling the Stall function during regeneration Settings With Stall Prevention Without Stall Prevention Direct Access Number F453 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default With Stall Prevention Changeable During Run Yes Current Differential Gain Program gt Special Control Parameters gt Special Parameters gt Current Differential Gain This parameter determines the degree that the current differential function affects the output signal The larger the value entered here the more pronounced the Current Differential Gain Direct Access Number F454 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 1 23 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 327 6 VIAI Bias Adjust Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints gt VI II gt Bias This parameter is used to fine tune the bias of the VI II input terminals Note See note on pg 50 for further information on the VI II terminal This setting may be used to ensure that the zero level of the input source pot pressure transducer flow meter etc is also the zero level setting of the ASD system This is accomplished by set
204. istent with the configuration information A non 3 phase motor is being used Incorrect settings at parameter F400 F413 or F414 Using a motor that has a significantly smaller rating than the ASD ASD output cabling is too small too long or is being housed in a cable tray with other cables that are producing an interfering EMF Motor is running during the Autotune function Comm Error Communication malfunction Improper or loose connection Improper system settings Ctrl Undervolts e This fault is caused by an undervoltage condition at the 5 15 or the 24 VDC supply e 3 phase input voltage low CPU Error e CPU malfunction Main Undervolts 3 phase input voltage low Defective control board Excessive load on the power supply Undervoltage Ridethrough settings require adjustment Fuse e Internal DC bus fuse is open Note The event that caused the Trip s must be corrected or must decrease to less than the threshold value required to cause the trip to allow for a Reset to be recognized In the event of multiple active trips the trip displayed will remain until all faults are corrected and all trips are cleared 172 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Fault Screen Display Possible Causes DBR Overcurrent ASD inability to discharge the bus voltage during regeneration
205. ive will hold at the frequency of the lower level of the Jump Frequency range until the programmed acceleration ramp reaches the upper level of the Jump Frequency range Then the output frequency of the drive will accelerate to the upper level of the Jump Frequency range and continue upward as programmed During deceleration the output frequency of the drive will hold at the frequency of the upper level of the Jump Frequency range until the programmed deceleration ramp reaches the lower level of the Jump Frequency range Then the output frequency of the drive will decelerate to the lower level of the Jump Frequency range and continue downward as programmed Once set up and enabled it is on in all control modes User selected frequencies may be jumped to avoid the negative effects of mechanical resonance Direct Access Number F270 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz Jump Frequency 1 Bandwidth Program gt Special Control Parameters gt Jump Frequencies This parameter establishes a plus or minus value for Jump Frequency 1 see F270 Direct Access Number F271 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 30 00 Units Hz Jump Frequency 2 Program gt Special Control Parameters gt Jump Frequencies Same as Jump Frequency
206. l determine the direction of the motor rotation Settings Forward Reverse Note If using the LCD EOI press ESC from the Frequency Command screen to access the Motor Direction parameter F008 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default Forward Changeable During Run Yes Accel 1 Time Program Fundamental Parameters gt Accel Decel 1 Settings This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the drive to go from 0 0 Hz to the Maximum Frequency for the 1 Acceleration profile The accel decel pattern may be set using F502 The minimum accel decel time may be set using F508 Note An acceleration time shorter than the load will allow may cause nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads Automatic Accel Decel and Stall settings may lengthen the acceleration time Acceleration The acceleration rate of a motor is determined by several factors applied power applied load and the physical properties of the motor winding parameters motor size etc The ASD will control the first of these factors input power The settings of the ASD control the frequency and amplitude of the applied voltage to the motor Under most operating conditions as the output frequency of the drive goes up so does the output voltage linear acceleration The ASD has the ability to modify the relationship between frequency and voltage automatically to produce smoother operation or increased st
207. lay and provides information that assists the user in the event that a Fault is incurred The User Notification codes are displayed as an indication that a system function or system condition is active i e ATN DB and DBON The code is displayed on the EOI for the duration of the activation If a user setting or an ASD parameter has been exceeded or if a data transfer function produces an unexpected result a condition that is referred to as a Fault is incurred An Alarm is an indication that a Fault is imminent if existing operating conditions continue unchanged An Alarm may be associated with an output terminal to notify the operator of the condition remotely close a contact or engage a brake At the least an Alarm will cause an alarm code to appear on the EOI display Table 8 on pg 169 lists the 15 possible Alarm codes that may be displayed during operation of the HX7 ASD In the event that the condition that caused the Alarm does not return to its normal operating level within a specified time the ASD Faults and a Trip is incurred Fault and Trip are sometimes used interchangeably A Trip is a safety feature and is the result of a Fault that disables the ASD system in the event that a subsystem of the ASD is malfunctioning or one or more of the variables listed below exceeds its normal range time and or magnitude e Current e Voltage e Speed e Temperature e Torque or e Load See Table 10 on pg 172 for a listing
208. le During Run Yes Minimum 1 Maximum 1280 152 Analog 2 Terminal Setting Program Meter Terminal Adjustment Parameters gt Analog 2 This parameter sets the Analog 2 multifunction programmable terminal to 1 of 33 possible functions and is available on the ASD Multicom option board only Possible assignments for this output terminal are listed in Table 6 on pg 166 Direct Access Number F674 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Post compensation Frequency Changeable During Run Yes HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F675 F703 Analog 2 Terminal Adjustment Program gt Meter Terminal Adjustment Parameters gt Analog 2 This parameter adjusts the coefficient of the circuit to obtain an output that corresponds with a known input This function is used in the calibration of external signal measuring devices DVM counters etc Direct Access Number F675 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 512 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 1 Maximum 1280 FP Terminal Setting Program Terminal Selection Parameters gt FP This parameter commands the multifunction programmable FP terminal to monitor the value of 1 of 33 possible system functions As the monitored function changes in magnitude or frequency the pulse count of the FP output
209. led VIII RR RX RX2 option Setting LED Keypad Option Only HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Direct Access Number F661 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run No 151 F670 F674 AM Terminal Assignment Program Meter Terminal Adjustment Parameters gt AM This parameter assigns a function to the AM output terminal The AM output terminal produces an output current that is proportional to the magnitude of the function assigned to this terminal The available assignments for this output terminal are listed in Table 6 on pg 166 Note To read voltage at this terminal a 100 500Q resistor is required and it must be connected from AM to AM The voltage is read across the 100 500Q resistor Current may be read by connecting an ammeter from AM to FM The AM analog output has a maximum resolution of 1 1024 The AM Terminal Adjustment F671 must be used to calibrate the output signal for a proper response SW 1 may be switched to allow for the full range output to be either 0 1 mA or 4 20 mA when providing an output current or either 0 1 or 1 7 5 volts when providing an output voltage at this terminal Direct Access Number F670 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Output Current Changeable Du
210. lt 1 Changeable During Run No Group 4 Speed 1 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Speeds Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 Direct Access Number F561 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 9 Changeable During Run No Group 4 Speed 2 Program gt Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Speeds Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 Direct Access Number F562 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 10 Changeable During Run No Group 4 Speed 3 Program gt Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Speeds Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 Direct Access Number F563 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 11 Changeable During Run No Group 4 Speed 4 Program gt Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Speeds Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 Direct Access Number F564 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 12 Changeable During Run No Group 4 Speed 5 Program gt Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Speeds Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 Direct Access Number F565 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 13 Changeable During Run No Group 4 Speed 6 Program gt Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Speeds Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 Direct Access Number F566 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 14 Changeable
211. lt 80 0 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz Reverse Speed Limit Input Program Torque Setting Parameters Torque Control This parameter Enables Disables the Reverse Speed Limit Input control function When enabled and operating in the Torque Control mode the reverse speed limit is controlled by the terminal selected here If Setting is selected the value set at F428 is used as the Reverse Speed Limit input Settings Disabled VIAL RR RX RX2 option Setting Direct Access Number F427 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run Yes Reverse Speed Limit Level Program Torque Setting Parameters Torque Control This parameter provides a value to be used as the Reverse Speed Limit setting if Setting is selected at F427 F428 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 80 0 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz Torque Command Mode Program Torque Setting Parameters Torque Speed Limiting This parameter specifies whether the torque command function is to be used in one direction or both F R Settings Fixed Direction F R Permitted HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F429 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Fixed Di
212. m Not used Lockout Reset Lockout Monitor Lockout Run Stop Lockout Parameter Access Lockout Lockout Parameter Write N A Lockout Frequency Change Lockout Options Lockout Local Remote Password Enable Enter Review Startup Screen Displays the Startup screen ESC to clear UTILITY PARAMETERS Typeform CPU Version CPU Revision Versions read only N A EEPROM 1 Version EEPROM 2 Version EOI Version User defined Units Enable Disable User defined Units Display Units Hz Per User defined Unit F702 N A Frequency Display Resolution F703 Units for Voltage and Current F701 None Auto Setup for 50 Hz Auto Setup for 60 Hz Restore Factory Defaults Clear Trip Type Reset Clear Run Timer F007 New Base Drive Board Save User Parameters Restore User Parameters Reload EOI Flash Reset EOI Memory HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual 33 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Program Menu Navigation Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name aera TERMINAL SELECTION F PiU PARAMETERS Fill ST F113 RES F114 S1 F115 2 F116 S3 F117 S4 F118 Input Terminal Function S5 F119 S6 F120 S7 F121 1
213. mation net F536 F546 Group 1 Speed 6 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Speeds Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 Direct Access Number F536 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 6 Changeable During Run No Group 1 Speed 7 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Speeds Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 Direct Access Number F537 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 7 Changeable During Run No Group 1 Speed 8 Program gt Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Speeds Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 Direct Access Number F538 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 8 Changeable During Run No Group 2 Speed Repeat Factor Program gt Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Speeds This parameter sets the number of times that the enabled preset speeds of Group 2 will be run 0 254 or Infinite Direct Access Number F540 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 1 Changeable During Run No Group 2 Speed 1 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Speeds Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 Direct Access Number F541 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 9 Changeable During Run No Group 2 Speed 2 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Speeds Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 Direct Access Number F54
214. mit Torque Reference Selection F430 Speed Limit Torque Level F431 Speed Limit Torque Band F432 Speed Limit Torque Recovery Time F433 FEEDBACK Input Selection F360 PARAMETERS Proportional P Gain F362 Integral 1 Gain F363 Feedback Settings Differential D Gain F366 Delay Filter F361 Deviation Limits Upper Lower F364 Position Difference Limit F631 Number of PG Input Pulses F367 PG Input Phases F368 PG Disconnection Detection Selection F369 Electronic Gear Setting F370 PG Settings Position Loop Gain F371 Positioning Completion Range F32 Frequency Limit at Position F373 Current Control Proportional Gain F374 Current Control Integral Gain F375 38 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Program Menu Navigation Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name are FEEDBACK Speed Loop Proportional Gain F376 PARAMETERS PG Settings Speed Loop Integral Gain F377 Motor Counter Data Selection F378 Speed Loop Parameter Ratio F379 Drooping Gain 100 F320 Speed at Drooping Gain 0 F321 Speed at Drooping Gain 100 F322 Drooping Insensitive Torque Band F323 Drooping Control Drooping Output Filter F324 Drooping Reference F327 Load Inertia Acc Dec Torque F325 Load Torque Filter F326 Adding Input S
215. n Upon receipt of the equipment inspect the packaging and equipment for shipping damage Carefully unpack the equipment and check for parts that were damaged during shipping missing parts or concealed damage If any discrepancies are discovered it should be noted with the carrier prior to accepting the shipment if possible File a claim with the carrier if necessary and immediately notify your Toshiba sales representative DO NOT install or energize equipment that has been damaged Damaged equipment may fail during operation resulting in equipment damage or personal injury Check to see that the rated capacity and the model number specified on the nameplate conform to the order specifications Modification of this equipment is dangerous and must not be performed except by factory trained representatives When modifications are required contact your Toshiba sales representative Inspections may be required before and after moving installed equipment Keep the equipment in an upright position Contact your Toshiba sales representative to report discrepancies or for assistance if required Handling and Storage Use proper lifting techniques when moving the HX7 ASD including properly sizing up the load getting assistance and using a forklift if required Store in a well ventilated covered location and preferably in the original carton if the equipment will not be used upon receipt Store in a cool clean and dry location Avoid sto
216. n Lower Limit Adjustment 130 S Pattern Upper Limit Adjustment 130 Special Control Parameters 42 Special Parameters 43 Speed at Drooping Gain 0 103 Speed at Drooping Gain 100 103 Speed Drop Detection Frequency Range 147 Speed Error 174 Speed Limit torque Reference 120 Speed Limit Torque Level 120 Speed Limit Torque Range 120 Speed Limit Torque Recovery 120 Speed Loop Integral Gain 111 Speed Loop Parameter Ratio 112 Speed Loop Proportional Gain 111 Speed Reach Frequency 54 Speed Reach Frequency Tolerance 54 Speed Ref Setpoint 35 Speeds 39 ST 8 9 ST Input Terminal Assignment 58 ST Input Terminal Delay 64 ST Signal Selection 55 Stall 36 Stall Cooperation Gain at Field Weakening Zone 126 Stall Prevention During Regeneration 123 Standard Mode Settings 32 Startup Frequency 90 Startup Wizard 32 Startup Wizard Requirements 21 Stop Pattern 154 Stop Reset Key 17 SWI 11 SWw2 11 Switching Frequency of Current Voltage Control 127 Switching Load Torque During Forward Run 105 Switching Load Torque During Reverse Run 106 Synchronized Torque Bias Input 117 System Configuration 29 System Operation 19 184 Tension 118 Tension Torque Bias Input 118 Terminal Board 8 Terminal Descriptions 9 Terminal Selection Parameters 34 Time Setting 32 Timer 30 Torque 30 Torque Boost Adjustment 150 Torque Command 117 Torque Command Filter 117 Torque Command Mode
217. n a single motor is to be controlled by multiple profiles HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F444 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 250 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 250 0 Units 121 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F445 F450 Regeneration Torque Limit 2 Program gt Torque Setting Parameters Manual Torque Limit Settings This parameter is used to set the negative torque upper limit for the 2 motor profile when multiple motors are controlled by a single drive or when a single motor is to be controlled by multiple profiles Direct Access Number F445 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 250 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 250 0 Units Driving Torque Limit 3 Program gt Torque Setting Parameters gt Manual Torque Limit Settings This parameter is used to set the positive torque upper limit for the 3 motor profile when multiple motors are controlled by a single drive or when a single motor is to be controlled by multiple profiles Direct Access Number F446 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 250 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 250 0 Units Regeneration Torque Limit 3 Program gt Torque Setting Parameters Manual Torque Limit Settings
218. n may be setup and enabled by connecting a braking resistor from terminal PA to PB of the drive and providing the proper information at F304 F308 and F309 For additional information on selecting the proper resistance value for a given application contact Toshiba s Marketing Department Direct Access Number F304 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run No Overvoltage Stall Program Protection Parameters gt Stall This parameter Enables Disables the Overvoltage Stall function When enabled this function causes the drive to extend the decel time when the DC bus voltage increases due to transient voltage spikes regeneration supply voltage out of specification etc in an attempt to reduce the bus voltage Settings Enabled Disabled Enabled Forced Shorted Deceleration Direct Access Number F305 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Enabled Changeable During Run Yes Motor 1 Max Output Voltage Program gt Motor Parameters gt Motor Set 1 This parameter sets the maximum value of the output voltage of the drive The Motor 1 Maximum Output Voltage is the Motor 1 output voltage at the Base Frequency F014 Regardless of the programmed value the output voltage cannot be higher than the input voltage The actual output voltage will be influenced by the input voltage of the ASD and the Supply Voltage Compensation setting F307 100
219. n time value for the 5 Preset Speed mode when used as part of a Pattern Run Direct Access Number F589 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 5 Changeable During Run No Minimum 1 Maximum 8000 Units Seconds Pattern Run 6 Run Time Setting Program Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Preset Speeds gt 6 This parameter sets the run time value for the 6 Preset Speed mode when used as part of a Pattern Run Direct Access Number F590 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 5 Changeable During Run No Minimum 1 Maximum 8000 Units Seconds Pattern Run 7 Run Time Setting Program Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Preset Speeds gt 7 This parameter sets the run time value for the 7 Preset Speed mode when used as part of a Pattern Run Direct Access Number F591 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 5 Changeable During Run No Minimum 1 Maximum 8000 Units Seconds Pattern Run 8 Run Time Setting Program Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Preset Speeds gt 8 This parameter sets the run time value for the 8 Preset Speed mode when used as part of a Pattern Run 140 Direct Access Number F592 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 5 Changeable During Run No Minimum 1 Maximum 8000 Units Seconds HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax
220. nal e Program gt Fundamental Parameters gt Standard Mode Selection gt a g Frequency Mode 1 gt RR Speed e Program gt Fundamental Parameters gt Standard Mode Selection gt Command Mode gt Use Control Terminal Strip e Set RR Speed Reference 1 F210 the input signal level that eae iN oy represents RR Torque Reference Setpoint 1 a Gutput Torque f ote Set RR Torque Reference Setpoint 1 F214 Gt eens e Set RR Speed Reference 2 F212 the input signal level that represents RR Torque Reference Setpoint 2 e Set RR Torque Reference Setpoint 2 F215 Provide a Run command F and or R Once set as the RR input changes the output torque of the ASD will vary in accordance with the above settings This parameter sets RR Speed Reference 1 and is the input signal level that is associated with the setting of RR Torque Reference Setpoint 1 while operating in the Torque Control mode 78 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F211 F214 RR Speed Frequency 1 Program gt Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints gt RR This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RR input terminal when the RR terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode See RR Speed Reference 1 F210 for further information on this setting This parameter sets RR
221. nal Strip e Set RX Speed Reference 1 F216 the input signal level that represents RX Speed Frequency 1 e Set RX Speed Frequency 1 F217 Set RX Speed Reference 2 F218 the input signal level that represents RX Speed Frequency 2 e Set RX Speed Frequency 2 F219 Provide a Run command F and or R Once set as the RX input changes the output frequency of the ASD will vary in accordance with the above settings This parameter sets RX Speed Reference 1 and is the input signal level that is associated with the setting of RX Speed Frequency 1 while operating in the Speed Control mode RX Input Torque Control Setup Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Torque control input at the RX input terminal e Program gt Fundamental Parameters gt Standard Mode Selection gt Frequency Mode 1 gt RX e Program gt Fundamental Parameters gt Standard Mode Selection gt Command Mode gt Use Control Terminal Strip e Set RX Speed Reference 1 F216 the input signal level that represents RX Torque Reference Setpoint 1 e Set RX Torque Reference Setpoint 1 F220 e Set RX Speed Reference 2 F218 the input signal level that represents RX Torque Reference Setpoint 2 e Set RX Torque Reference Setpoint 2 F221 Provide a Run command F and or R Once set as the RX input changes the output torque of the ASD will vary in accordance with the above settings
222. nal device Loose or improper connection Out put Phase Loss 3 phase output from the ASD is low or missing Note The event that caused the Trip s must be corrected or must decrease to less than the threshold value required to cause the trip to allow for a Reset to be recognized In the event of multiple active trips the trip displayed will remain until all faults are corrected and all trips are cleared HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual 173 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Fault Screen Display Possible Causes Overcurrent Acc V f setting needs to be adjusted Restart from a momentary power outage The ASD is starting into a rotating motor ASD Motor not properly matched Phase to phase short U V or W Accel time too short Voltage Boost setting is too high Motor machine jammed Mechanical brake engaged while the ASD is running ASD current exceeds 340 of the rated FLA on ASDs that are 100 HP or less during acceleration On ASDs that are greater than 100 HP this fault occurs when the ASD current exceeds 320 of the rated FLA during acceleration Overcurrent Dec Phase to phase short U V or W Deceleration time is too short Motor machine jammed Mechanical brake engaged while the ASD is running ASD current exceeds 340 of the rated FLA on ASDs that are 100 HP or less during decelerati
223. ncy command or ens 4 frequency setpoint The HX7 ASD may output frequencies What is your upper limmtnequency higher than the Upper Limit Frequency but lower than iso ie the Maximum Frequency when operating in the PID Mest Control mode Torque Control mode or the Vector Control modes sensorless or feedback Lower Limit Frequency This parameter sets the lowest frequency that the HX7 ASD gt will accept as a frequency command or frequency setpoint The HX7 ASD will output frequencies lower than the H natis yourlowenlmitteguency Lower Limit Frequency when accelerating to the lower limit or decelerating to a stop Frequencies below the Lower Limit may be output when operating in the PID Control mode Torque Control mode or the Vector Control modes sensorless or feedback HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual 21 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Adjust Accel Decel Automatically When enabled the HX7 ASD adjusts the acceleration and deceleration rates according to the applied load The acceleration and deceleration times range from 12 5 to 800 of the programmed values for the active acceleration time e g Acceleration Time 1 F009 and Deceleration Time 1 F010 The motor and the load must be connected prior to selecting Automatic Accel Decel Wizard Accel Decel Do you want the drive to adjust accel decel times automatically Yes
224. nd deceleration pattern for the 4 Accel Decel parameter Settings Linear S Pattern 1 S Pattern 2 F516 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default Linear Changeable During Run Yes HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F517 F517 Accel Decel Switching Frequency 3 Program gt Special Control Parameters gt Accel Decel Special This parameter sets the frequency at which the acceleration control is switched from the Accel 3 profile to the Accel 4 profile during a multiple acceleration profile configuration Direct Access Number F517 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz Pattern Run Program Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Pattern Run This parameter Enables Disables the Pattern Run mode When enabled this feature allows up to 15 Preset Speeds to be run sequentially for a user determined duration and number of times Settings Disabled Enabled box checked Pattern Run Description User defined Preset Speeds are labeled 1 15 see F018 The ID number of any one of the fifteen frequencies 1 15 may be entered into the Speed field of the Pattern Run screen and run for the number of times entered into the Repeat field see F53
225. ndby Closing a set of contacts to either F or R will cause the ASD to accelerate the motor to the programmed setpoint of F or R Opening the F and R contact will disable the ASD and the motor will coast to a stop The control terminal ST may be configured for other functions P Output s and R Off ForR s F103 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default ST CC Required Direct Access Number Changeable During Run No R F Priority Selection Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters gt Input Special Functions The R F Priority Selection determines the operation of the ASD if both the R and F control terminals are activated Settings Reverse Suspend The waveforms below depict the motor response for all combinations of the F and R terminal settings if the Reverse option is chosen The Suspend setting will decelerate the motor to a stop regardless of the rotation direction when both the F and R control terminals are activated HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F105 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Reverse Changeable During Run No Motor Direction ao a R t l R 55 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F106 F107 Input Terminal Priority Direct Access Number F106 Program gt Terminal
226. nds Pattern Run 2 Continuation Mode Run Time Setting Program Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Preset Speeds gt 2 This parameter sets the run time value for the 2 Preset Speed mode when used as part of a Pattern Run HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F586 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 5 Changeable During Run No Minimum 1 Maximum 8000 Units Seconds 139 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F587 F592 Pattern Run 3 Run Time Setting Program gt Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Preset Speeds gt 3 This parameter sets the run time value for the 3 Preset Speed mode when used as part of a Pattern Run Direct Access Number F587 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 5 Changeable During Run No Minimum 1 Maximum 8000 Units Seconds Pattern Run 4 Run Time Setting Program Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Preset Speeds gt 4 This parameter sets the run time value for the 4 Preset Speed mode when used as part of a Pattern Run Direct Access Number F588 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 5 Changeable During Run No Minimum 1 Maximum 8000 Units Seconds Pattern Run 5 Run Time Setting Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Preset Speeds gt 5 This parameter sets the ru
227. ne Run Yes Reference 2 speed control input Minimum 0 0 See F811 for further information on this setting Maximum Max Freq F011 This parameter sets Communications Speed Frequency 2 and is the Units Hz frequency that is associated with the setting of Communications Speed Reference 2 Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled Off then On for the changes to take effect RS232 RS485 Baud Rate Direct Access Number F820 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 9600 Changeable During Run Yes HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F821 F830 RS232 RS485 Wire Count Program gt Communication Setting Parameters Communication Settings This parameter sets the communications protocol to the 2 or 4 wire method Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled Off then On for the changes to take effect Settings 2 wire 4 wire F821 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default 4 Changeable During Run Yes RS232 RS485 Response Delay Time Program gt Communication Setting Parameters Communication Settings This parameter sets the RS232 RS485 response delay time Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled Off then On for the changes to take effect F825 Parameter Type
228. ng Placing the EOI in the Local mode selects either the RS232 RS485 or the Common Serial TTL as the Command Mode control source Once in the Local mode the LCD Port Connection setting determines if the RS232 RS485 or if the Common Serial TTL will be used for Command control Local mode operation may be superseded by commands received via Communications In addition the remaining control sources may be placed into the override mode using Communications The source of the Command control signal may be selected by e The F003 setting e Placing an item from the list below in the Override mode via communications or e Placing the EOI in the Local mode places only the RS232 RS485 or the Common Serial TTL in the Override mode Possible Command signal source selections include the following e Control Terminal Strip default e LED Keypad Option e Common Serial TTL e RS232 RS485 e Communication Card or the 24 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net e 003 setting is used if no signal sources are in the Override mode Note The Control Terminal Strip is placed in the Override mode by assigning a discrete terminal to Command Control Terminal Strip Priority 54 and connecting the terminal to CC Once activated Run command required the Control Terminal Strip settings will be used for Override Command control F R
229. ng Run Yes Communication Interval Program Communication Setting Parameters Communication Settings This parameter sets the Common Serial response delay time Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled Off then On for the changes to take effect Direct Access Number F805 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 2 00 Units Seconds 158 TTL Master Output Program gt Communication Setting Parameters Communication Settings In a master follower configuration this setting determines the output parameter of the master ASD that will be used to control the applicable follower ASDs Note Select No Follower if F826 is configured as a Master Output controller Otherwise an EOI failure will result Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled Off then On for the changes to take effect Settings No Follower normal operation Frequency Reference Output Command Frequency Torque Command Output Torque Command F806 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default No Follower normal operation Changeable During Run Yes HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F810 F811 Frequency Point Selection Program Communication Setting
230. ng to contact bounce or chatter Direct Access Number F143 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 8 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 2 0 Maximum 200 0 Units mS S1 S4 Input Terminal Delay Program Terminal Selection Parameters Input Terminal Delays gt S1 S4 This parameter delays the response of the drive to any change in the S1 S4 terminal input by the programmed value see waveforms at F140 The delay may be increased to provide additional electrical noise immunity or to prevent the ASD from responding to contact bounce or chatter Direct Access Number F144 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 8 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 2 0 Maximum 200 0 Units mS S5 S16 Input Terminal Delay Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters gt Input Terminal Delays gt S5 S16 This parameter delays the response of the drive to any change in the S5 S16 terminal input by the programmed value see waveforms at F140 The delay may be increased to provide additional electrical noise immunity or to prevent the ASD from responding to contact bounce or chatter Direct Access Number F145 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 8 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 2 0 Maximum 200 0 Units mS HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Ema
231. nment gt ON This parameter selects the functionality of the virtual input terminal ON As a virtual terminal the ON control terminal exists only in memory and is considered to always be in its True or connected to CC state It is often practical to assign this terminal to a function that the user desires to be maintained regardless of external conditions or operations This parameter sets the programmable ON terminal to of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 5 on pg 162 Direct Access Number F110 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Unassigned Changeable During Run No F Input Terminal Assignment Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters Input Terminal Assignment gt F This parameter selects the functionality of the F input terminal In addition the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This parameter sets the programmable F terminal to 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 5 on pg 162 Direct Access Number F111 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Forward Changeable During Run No R Input Terminal Assignment Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters gt Input Terminal Assignment gt R This parameter selects the functionality of the R input terminal In addition the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This parameter sets the programmable R t
232. nnected to the motor e The 3 phase input voltage is within the specified tolerance e There are no shorts and all grounds are secured e All personnel are at a safe distance from the motor and the motor driven equipment 16 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Electronic Operator Interface The HX7 ASD Electronic Operator Interface EOI is comprised of an LCD display two LEDs a rotary encoder and eight keys These items are described below and their locations are provided in Figure 15 on pg 17 The EOI can be mounted remotely from the ASD as described in the section titled EOI Remote Mounting on pg 27 The dimensional requirements for remote mounting is also found there Using a screw length that exceeds the specified dimensions may cause deformation of the outer surface of the bezel as shown in Figure 20 on pg 29 and should be avoided The interface can operate up to distances of 15 feet from the ASD via the Common Serial TTL Port For distances beyond 15 feet the RS232 RS485 port is recommended EOI Features Figure 15 The HX7 ASD Electronic Operator Interface TOSHIBA LCD Display oe Enter Key Local Remote Up Down Arrow Key LED Keys Monitor Program Rotary Encoder Key Run Key LED ESC Key
233. nounced quicker the effect of the integral function HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F377 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 10 0 Maximum 200 0 111 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F378 F382 Motor Counter Data Program Feedback Parameters gt PG Settings This parameter sets the pulses per revolution displayed at the Monitor screen when using a shaft mounted encoder for speed control This setting is used for display purposes only and does not affect the speed control of the system If zero is selected here then the setting at F370 Electronic Gear Setting determines the pulses per revolution to be displayed at the Monitor screen Settings Selection 0 F370 setting Selection 1 256 pulses revolution Selection 2 512 pulses revolution Selection 3 1024 pulses revolution Selection 4 2048 pulses revolution Selection 5 4096 pulses revolution Direct Access Number F378 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Selection 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum Selection 0 Maximum Selection 5 Speed Loop Parameter Ratio Program Feedback Parameters gt PG Settings Contact Toshiba s Marketing Department for information on this parameter Direct Access Number F379 Parameter Ty
234. o have the same torque ratios for mechanically coupled motors F320 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 100 0 Units Speed at Drooping Gain 0 Program Feedback Parameters Drooping Control This parameter sets the motor speed when at the 0 output torque gain while operating in the Drooping Control mode This function determines the lowest speed that Drooping will be in effect for motors that share the same load F321 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 60 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 320 0 Units Hz Speed at Drooping Gain 100 Program Feedback Parameters gt Drooping Control This parameter sets the motor speed when at the 100 output torque gain while operating in the Drooping Control mode This function determines the speed of the individual motors at the 100 Drooping Gain setting for motors that share the same load F322 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 60 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 320 0 Units Hz Drooping Insensitive Torque Range Program Feedback Parameters Drooping Control This parameter defines a torque range in which the Drooping Control settings will be ignored and the programmed torque settings will be follow
235. oad High Speed Operation Switching Lower Limit Frequency 105 Line Power Switching 34 35 Load Drooping 173 Load End OC 173 Load Inertia Acc Dec Torque 104 Load Sharing Gain Input 118 Load Torque Filter Acc Dec Torque 104 Local Remote Key 32 LocallRemote Key 18 Lockout 33 LOD Boost Time 156 LOD Control and Stopping Method 155 LOD Feedback Level Hz 156 LOD Restart Delay Time 156 LOD Setpoint Boost Hz 156 LOD Start Level Hz 156 LOD Start Time 156 Low Current Settings 37 Low Current Trip 144 Low Current Trip Threshold 144 Low Current Trip Threshold Time 144 Low Output Disable 155 Low Speed Signal Output Frequency 53 Lower Deviation Limits 109 Lower Limit Frequency 21 49 Main EEPROM Err 173 Main Undervolts 172 Manual Torque Limit Settings 38 maximum Carrier Frequency 98 Maximum Frequency 49 Menu Options 29 Meter Terminal Adjustment Parameters 41 Mode 1 2 Switching Frequency 76 MOFF 169 MON PRG 18 Monitor Setup 42 MOP acceleration rate 163 MOP deceleration rate 163 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Motor 1 Base Frequency 49 Motor 1 Max Output Voltage 100 Motor 1 Torque Boost 50 Motor 2 Base Frequency 68 Motor 2 Max Output Voltage 68 Motor 2 Torque Boost 68 Motor 3 Base Frequency 69 Motor 3 Max Output Voltage 69
236. ode setting and initiates the programmed stopping method 36 Stop Key Emulation Activating this terminal terminates the Run command being received from communications devices and initiates the programmed stopping method 43 Binary Data Write This terminal serves two functions 1 While operating in the Use Binary BCD input mode each momentary connection of this terminal to CC transfers the speed torque Binary Bit 0 MSB settings to the motor 2 The Motorized Pot frequency command will be saved during power down or reset by setting F108 to Store and setting an input terminal to 43 binary Data Write If the drive is running and the Binary Data Write terminal is active when an event occurs Fault Power off the Motorized Pot frequency command will be restored upon power up or reset 44 Motorized Pot Up MOP Momentarily connecting this terminal to CC causes an increase in motor speed for the duration of the connection until the Upper Limit is reached The Frequency Mode setting must be set to Motorized Pot Simulation The MOP acceleration rate is determined by the F500 setting 45 Motorized Pot Down MOP Momentarily connecting this terminal to CC causes a decrease in motor speed for the duration of the connection until the Lower Limit is reached The Frequency Mode setting must be set to Motorized Pot Simulation The MOP deceleration rate is determined by the F501 setting 46 Motorized
237. of the potential Trips and the associated probable causes The operating conditions at the time of the trip may be used to help determine the cause of the trip Listed below are operating conditions that may be used to assist the operator in correcting the problem or that the ASD operator should be prepared to discuss when contacting Toshiba s Customer Support for assistance e What trip information is displayed e Ts this a new installation e Has the system ever worked properly and what are the recent modifications if any e What is the ASD Motor size e What is the CPU version and revision level e What is the EOI version e Does the ASD trip when accelerating running decelerating or when not running e Does the ASD reach the commanded frequency e Does the ASD trip without the motor attached e Does ASD trip with an unloaded motor 168 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Alarms Table 8 lists the alarm codes that may be displayed during operation of the HX7 ASD Each alarm code listed is accompanied by a description and a possible cause In the event that the source of the malfunction cannot be determined contact your Toshiba Sales Representative for further information on the condition and for an appropriate course of action The active Alarm is displayed on the Frequency Command screen Multiple active alarms are dis
238. ogram gt Protection Parameters gt Trip Settings This parameter Enables Disables the Trip Save at Power Down setting When enabled this feature logs the trip event and retains the trip information when the system powers down The trip information may be viewed from the Monitor screen When disabled the trip information will be cleared when the system powers down Settings Disabled Enabled box checked F602 Parameter Type Check Box Direct Access Number Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run No HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F603 F606 Emergency Off Mode Settings Program gt Protection Parameters gt Emergency Off Settings This parameter determines the method used to stop the motor in the event that an Emergency Off command is received and the system is configured to use this feature This setting may also be associated with the FL terminals to allow the FL relay to change states when an EOFF condition occurs by setting the FL terminal to Fault FL all see F132 Note A supplemental emergency stopping system should be used with the ASD Emergency stopping should not be a task of the ASD alone Settings Coast Stop Deceleration Stop DC Injection Braking Stop F603 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default Coast Sto
239. ogrammed value see waveforms at F150 Minimum 2 0 The delay may be increased to prevent relay chatter Maximum 200 0 Units mS OUT6 On Delay Direct Access Number F155 Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters gt Output Terminal Delays Parameter Type Numerical OUT6 Factory Default 2 0 This parameter delays the closing of the OUT6 output terminals by the Changeable Durme Run No programmed value see waveforms at F150 Minimum 2 0 The delay may be increased to prevent relay chatter Maximum 200 0 Units mS OUT7 On Delay Direct Access Number F156 Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters gt Output Terminal Delays Parameter Type Numerical OUT7 Factory Default 2 0 This parameter delays the closing of the OUT7 output terminals by the Changeable During Run No programmed value see waveforms at F150 Minimum 2 0 The delay may be increased to prevent relay chatter Maximum 200 0 Units mS OUT1 Off Delay Direct Access Number F160 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 2 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 2 0 Maximum 200 0 Units mS OUT2 Off Delay Program Terminal Selection Parameters Output Terminal Delays gt OUT2 This parameter delays the opening of the OUT2 A amp C output terminals by the programmed value see waveforms at F160 The delay may be increased to allow the devices that are connected to OUT2 to respond Di
240. ol input while operating in the Speed Control or the Torque Control mode This setting may be used to ensure that the zero level of the input source pot pressure transducer flow meter etc is also the zero level setting of the ASD system This is accomplished by setting the input source to zero and either increasing or decreasing this setting to provide an output of zero from the ASD Direct Access Number F474 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 99 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 255 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F475 F480 RX Gain Adjust Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints RX gt Gain This parameter is used to fine tune the gain of the RX input terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control or the Torque Control mode This setting may be used to ensure that the 100 level of the input source pot pressure transducer flow meter etc is also the 100 level setting of the ASD system This is accomplished by setting the input source to 100 and either increasing or decreasing this setting to provide an output of 100 from the ASD Direct Access Number F475 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 141 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 255
241. on On ASDs that are greater than 100 HP it occurs when the ASD current exceeds 320 of the rated FLA during deceleration Overcurrent Run Load fluctuations ASD is operating at an elevated temperature ASD current exceeds 340 of the rated FLA on ASDs that are 100 HP or less during a fixed speed run or if during a fixed speed run the ASD overheats On ASDs that are greater than 100 HP it occurs when the ASD current exceeds 320 of the rated FLA on a fixed speed run Overheat e Cooling fan inoperative e Ventilation openings are obstructed e Internal thermistor is disconnected Speed Error e Result of a motor speed that is greater than the commanded speed when using an encoder for speed control Improper encoder connection or setup information Defective encoder Note The event that caused the Trip s must be corrected or must decrease to less than the threshold value required to cause the trip to allow for a Reset to be recognized In the event of multiple active trips the trip displayed will remain until all faults are corrected and all trips are cleared 174 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Fault Screen Display Possible Causes Overtorque A torque requirement by the load in excess of the setting of parameter F616 or F617 for a time longer than the setting of parameter F618 The AS
242. on List Factory Default Forward Changeable During Run No Preset Speed Direction 8 Program gt Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Preset Speeds Determines the forward reverse setting for the 8 Preset Speed F287 Settings Forward Reverse HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F388 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Forward Changeable During Run No 113 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F389 F394 Preset Speed Direction 9 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Preset Speeds Determines the forward reverse setting for the 9 Preset Speed F288 Settings Forward Reverse Direct Access Number F389 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Forward Changeable During Run No Preset Speed Direction 10 Program gt Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Preset Speeds Determines the forward reverse setting for the 10 Preset Speed F289 Settings Forward Reverse Direct Access Number F390 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Forward Changeable During Run No Preset Speed Direction 11 Program gt Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Preset Speeds Determines the forward reverse setting for the 11 Preset Speed F290 Settings Forward Reverse Direct Access Number F391 Parameter Typ
243. on net Email info ctiautomation net Startup Wizard Requirements The Startup Wizard queries the user for information on the input and output signal parameters of the HX7 ASD The HX7 ASD may also be setup by directly accessing each of the control parameters via the Program menu or the Direct Access Numbers see the section titled Direct Access Parameter Information on pg 53 Upon initial system power up the Startup Wizard starts automatically The user is queried to either 1 run the Startup Wizard Run Now 2 run the Startup Wizard at the next power up Run Next Time or 3 perform a manual setting of user selected parameters Manually Configure Select 2 Run Next Time to return to the Program menu without making any system changes Select 3 Manually Configure and the subsequent Finish box to return to the Frequency Command screen Select 1 Run Now to run the Startup Wizard The user is queried for configuration data for the HX7 ASD using the following user input screens Press ESC at any time to go back to the previous screen Motor Rating Motors are designed and manufactured for a specific Wizard Motor Rati voltage and frequency range The voltage and frequency pais pases specifications for a given motor may be found on the AUN birk nameplate of the motor 200V 230V_60Hz Manually Configure Finish Upper Limit Frequency This parameter sets the highest frequency that the HX7 ASD will accept as a freque
244. on of Toshiba International Corporation The warranty contained in the contract between the parties is the sole warranty of Toshiba International Corporation and any statements contained herein do not create new warranties or modify the existing warranty Any electrical or mechanical modifications to this equipment without prior written consent of Toshiba International Corporation will void all warranties and may void the UL CUL listing or other safety certifications Unauthorized modifications may also result in a safety hazard or equipment damage Misuse of this equipment could result in injury and or equipment damage In no event will Toshiba Corporation be responsible or liable for direct indirect special or consequential damage or injury that may result from the misuse of this equipment Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net About This Manual This manual was written by the Toshiba Technical Publications Group This group is tasked with providing technical documentation for the HX7 Adjustable Speed Drive Every effort has been made to provide accurate and concise information to you our customer At Toshiba we re continuously searching for better ways to meet the constantly changing needs of our customers E mail your comments questions or concerns about this publication Manual s Purpose and Scope This manual provides information on how to program and operate your H
245. ory Default 4 Changeable During Run No Group 3 Speed 5 Program gt Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Speeds Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 Direct Access Number F555 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 5 Changeable During Run No Group 3 Speed 6 Program gt Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Speeds Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 Direct Access Number F556 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 6 Changeable During Run No Group 3 Speed 7 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Speeds Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 136 Direct Access Number F557 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 7 Changeable During Run No HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F558 F568 Group 3 Speed 8 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Speeds Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 Direct Access Number F558 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 8 Changeable During Run No Group 4 Speed Repeat Factor Program Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Speeds This parameter sets the number of times that the enabled preset speeds of Group 4 will be run 1 254 or Infinite Direct Access Number F560 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Defau
246. ot used This parameter is used to input the wattage of the Dynamic Braking Resistor For additional information on selecting the proper resistor wattage value for a given application contact Toshiba s Marketing Department Note Using a resistor with a wattage rating that is too low may result in system damage F309 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD dependent Direct Access Number Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 01 Maximum 600 0 Units kW Ridethrough Time Program Protection Parameters gt Retry Restart In the event of a momentary power outage this parameter determines the length of the Ridethrough time During a Ridethrough regenerative energy is used to maintain the control circuitry settings it is not used to drive the motor The Ridethrough will be maintained for the number of seconds set using this parameter Note The actual Ridethrough Time is load dependent F310 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 2 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 320 0 Units Seconds Disable Forward Run Disable Reverse Run Program gt Frequency Setting Parameters gt Forward Reverse Disable This parameter Enables Disables the Forward Run or Reverse Run mode If either direction is disabled box checked commands received for the disabled direction will not be recognized If both directions
247. output disconnect the ASD and the motor must be stopped before the disconnect is either opened or closed Closing the output disconnect while the 3 phase output of the ASD is active may result in equipment damage or injury to personnel HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual 5 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Operational and Maintenance Precautions A WARNING A e Turm off lockout and tag out the main power the control power and instrumentation connections before inspecting or servicing the drive or opening the door of the enclosure e Turn off lockout and tag out the main power the control power and instrumentation connections before proceeding to disconnect or connect the power wiring to the equipment e The capacitors of the HX7 ASD maintain a residual charge for a period of time after turning off the ASD The required time for each ASD typeform is indicated with a cabinet label and a Charge LED Wait for at least the minimum time indicated on the enclosure mounted label and ensure that the Charge LED has gone out before opening the door of the ASD once the ASD power has been turned off e Turn the power on only after attaching or closing the front cover and DO NOT remove the front cover of the HX7 ASD when the power is on e DONOT attempt to disassemble modify or repair the HX7 ASD Call your Toshiba sales representative for repair information e DO NOT
248. ow Output Disable Feedback Level sets a frequency level that until the Changeable During Run Yes output of the ASD drops below this setting the Restart Delay Timer does not Minimum 0 0 pe Maximum Max Freq Units Hz LOD Restart Delay Time Direct Access Number F737 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 3600 0 Units Seconds HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F800 F803 Communication Baud Rate logic Program gt Communication Setting Parameters Communication Settings This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by establishing the Baud Rate of the communications link The communications network includes other ASDs and Host Control computers that monitor the status of the ASD s transfers commands and loads or modifies the parameter settings of the ASD Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled Off then On for the changes to take effect F800 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 9600 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 1200 Maximum 9600 Units BPS Parity Program gt Communication Setting Parameters Communication Settings This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network
249. p Changeable During Run No Emergency Off DC Injection Application Time Program Protection Parameters gt Emergency Off Settings When DC Injection is used as a function of receiving an Emergency Off command F603 this parameter determines the time that the DC Injection braking is applied to the motor Direct Access Number F604 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 10 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 10 00 Units Seconds Output Phase Loss Detection Program Protection Parameters gt Phase Loss This parameter Enables Disables the monitoring of each phase of the 3 phase output signal U V or W of the ASD If either line is missing inactive or not of the specified level the ASD incurs a trip Settings Disabled Enabled box checked Direct Access Number F605 Parameter Type Check Box Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run No OL Reduction Starting Frequency Program gt Protection Parameters gt Overload This parameter is used to reduce the start frequency during very low speed motor operation During very low speed operation the cooling efficiency of the motor decreases Lowering the start frequency aides in minimizing the generated heat HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual F606 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 6 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00
250. parameter See F004 and F200 for additional information on this setting Settings se VIM se RR se RX se Option Card RX2 se LED Keypad Option se Binary BCD Input se Common Serial TTL se RS232 RS485 se Communication Card se Motorized Pot Simulation se Pulse Input Option qaaqqqqqqqaqag Direct Access Number F207 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default VI II Changeable During Run Yes Mode 1 2 Switching Frequency Program gt Fundamental Parameters gt Standard Mode Selection gt Mode 1 2 Switching Frequency This parameter sets the threshold frequency that will be used in F200 to determine if Frequency Source 1 or 2 will control the output of the ASD See F200 for additional information on this setting Direct Access Number F208 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 1 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 1 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F209 F209 Analog Input Filter Direct Access Number F209 Program gt Frequency Setting Parameters gt Analog Filter Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default None Analog filtering is applied after the analog reference signal is converted to a digital signal The type of filtering used is Rolling Average over time Changeable During Run
251. pe Numerical Factory Default 1 00 Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 01 Maximum 10 00 Use Speed Mode Program Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Preset Speed Mode This parameter Enables Disables the Use Speed mode When enabled the system uses all of the parameter settings of the Preset Speed being run Otherwise only the frequency setting is used Settings Disabled Enabled box checked Direct Access Number F380 Parameter Type Check Box Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run No Preset Speed Direction 1 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Preset Speeds Determines the forward reverse setting for the 1 Preset Speed F018 Settings Forward Reverse Direct Access Number F381 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Forward Changeable During Run No Preset Speed Direction 2 Program gt Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Preset Speeds Determines the forward reverse setting for the 2 Preset Speed F019 Settings Forward Reverse 112 Direct Access Number F382 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Forward Changeable During Run No HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F383 F388 Preset Speed Direction 3 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Preset Speeds Dete
252. pecific suitability see F201 F206 P24 24 VDC 100 mA power supply for customer use PP This terminal provides a 10 VDC output that may be divided using a potentiometer The tapped voltage is applied to the RR input to provide manual control of the RR programmed function OUT1 The default function assigned to this terminal is Low Speed This output may be programmed to provide an indication open or closed that any one of the functions that are listed in Table 8 on page 175 has occurred or is active This function may be used to signal external equipment e g activate the brake see F130 The OUT1 terminal is rated at 2 A 120 VAC and 2 A 30 VDC OUT2 The default function assigned to this terminal is Reach Frequency This output may be programmed to provide an indication open or closed that any one of the functions that are listed in Table 8 on page 175 has occurred or is active This function may be used to signal external equipment e g activate the brake see F131 The OUT2 terminal is rated at 2 A 120 VAC and 2 A 30 VDC FP The default function of this output terminal is to output a series of pulses at a rate that is a function of the output frequency of the ASD As the output frequency of the ASD goes up so does the FP output pulse rate This terminal may be programmed to provide an output pulse rate that is proportional to the magnitude of the user selected item from Table 7 on page 174 see F676 AM
253. play section Running Speed UC Undercurrent Alarm example displayed Operating Mode LOC Hz Speed Command F RQ C M D z OO 2 O items see Monitor Screen on pg 30 User selectable monitored Output Cur 0 00 ASD Load 0 00 The Panel Menu screen provides easy access to the most common setup parameters Panel Menu changes will affect EOI controlled ASD operation only and is accessed by pressing the ESC key from the Frequency Command screen HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual 29 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Monitor Screen The Monitor screen reports the status of motor performance variables control settings and configuration data during motor operation The monitored items are listed and described below The items listed may be selected and displayed at the Frequency Command screen while the ASD is running See Program gt System Information and Setup gt Scrolling Monitor to select the monitored items to be displayed Note The Monitor screen lists the read only running status and the at trip status of the listed parameters Run Frequency If tripped this field records the at trip frequency Otherwise the current output frequency is displayed Frequency Reference Displays the current frequency command Output Current Shows the instantaneous output current as a percentage of the rating of the ASD or as a cur
254. played one at a time and are scrolled at one second intervals Table 8 HX7 ASD Alarms EOI P Function Description Possible Causes Display CM1 Comm1 Error Internal communications e Improperly programmed ASD error re e Improper communications settings CM2 Comm Error External communications e Improperly connected cables error EMG Emergency Off Output signal from the ASD e StoplReset pressed twice at the EOI terminated and A Druka EOFF command received remotely may be applied if so configured e ASD reset required MOFF Main Undervoltage condition at the e Low 3 phase input voltage Undervoltage 3 phase AC input to the ASD Oc Over Current ASD output current greater e Defective IGBT U V or W is a P arameret e ASD output to the motor is connected incorrectly Seime Disconnect the motor and retry e ASD output phase to phase short e The ASD is starting into a spinning motor e Motor machine jammed e Mechanical brake engaged while the ASD is starting or while running e Accel Decel time is too short e Voltage Boost setting is too high e Load fluctuations e ASD operating at an elevated temperature OH Overheat ASD ambient temperature e ASD is operating at an elevated temperature PA ERRIN e ASD is too close to heat generating equipment e Cooling fan vent is obstructed see Mounting the ASD on pg 13 e Cooling fan is inoperative e Internal thermistor is disconnected OJ Timer R
255. pulse train changes in direct proportion to changes in the monitored function As the monitored value goes up so does the pulse count of the FP output Note The duty cycle of the output pulse train remains at 65 5 0 us Possible assignments for this output terminal are listed in Table 6 on pg 166 Direct Access Number F676 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Output Frequency Changeable During Run Yes FP Terminal Adjustment Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters gt FP This parameter sets the full scale reading of the FP Terminal The full scale reading of the monitored variable selected in F676 may be set here Direct Access Number F677 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 3 840 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 1 000 Maximum 43 200 Units kHz Display Units for Voltage and Current Program gt Utility Parameters gt Display Units This parameter sets the unit of measurement for current and voltage values displayed on the EOI Settings V A Direct Access Number F701 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Changeable During Run Yes Hz Per User defined Unit Program Utility Parameters Display Units This parameter allows the user to input a quantity to be displayed on the EOI that is proportional to the output frequency of the drive This feature is useful when the output of a process is moved along at a rate tha
256. r Type Selection List Factory Default None This feature assists the user when performing fault analysis or by allowing a quick system setup change when required Performing a Type Reset results in one of the following user selected post reset configurations Changeable During Run No Settings None Auto Setup for 50 Hz Auto Setup for 60 Hz Restore Factory Defaults Clear Trip Clear Run Timer New Base Drive Board Save User Parameters Restore User Parameters Reload EOI Flash Reset EOI Memory Note User settings that are stored in the memory of the EOI are not saved via the Save User Parameters selection The unsaved functions include the EOI Option Setups Utility Parameters gt Display Units and Monitor Setup Scrolling Monitor Select HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual 47 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F008 F010 Direction of motor rotation No path available Direct Access Only While operating using the LED Keypad Option this parameter sets the direction of motor rotation This setting may be changed during operation This setting will not override parameter F311 Forward Reverse Disable If either direction is disabled via parameter F311 the disabled direction will not be recognized if commanded by the LED Keypad If both directions are disabled via parameter F311 the direction command from the LED Keypad wil
257. r criteria has been met DUTI S ASD se gt DUT Switch to commercial power command Direct Access Number F357 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 62 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum ASD dependent Maximum 10 00 Units Seconds Commercial Power Switching Freq Hold Time Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters gt Line Power Switching This parameter determines the amount of time that the connection to commercial power is maintained once the switch to drive output criteria has been met Direct Access Number F358 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 2 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 10 Maximum 10 00 Units Seconds Feedback Source Program Feedback Parameters Feedback Settings This parameter Enables Disables PID feedback control When enabled this parameter determines the source of the motor control feedback Settings PID Control Disabled VIAL RR RX RX2 option Proportional Integral Derivative PID A closed loop control technique that seeks error minimization by reacting to three values One that is proportional to the error one that is representative of the error and one that is representative of the rate of change of the error Direct Access Number F360 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Control Disabled Changeable During Run Yes F
258. r sets BIN Speed Reference 1 and is the input signal that is associated with the setting of BIN Torque Reference Setpoint 1 while operating in the Torque Control mode HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual F228 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 100 0 Units Frequency Settings F230 gt HPSS 100 e l I ee Ss e IS BIN I Loe Speed Ti Ref a 3 I ja I Ss i I oo l A a mm a 4 0 ik ae Output Frequency A F229 Fest 1 Hz e BIN Speed Frequency m 2 Hz Torque Settings 100 Input Signal ba Guteut Torque 250 F232 F233 1 4 BIN Torque Ref Setpoint m 2 87 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F229 F232 BIN Speed Frequency 1 Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints gt BIN This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the binary input when the discrete input terminals are used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode This parameter sets BIN Speed Frequency 1 and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of BIN Speed Reference 1 while operating in the Speed Control mode See BIN Speed Reference 1 F228 for further information on this setting
259. r this parameter may be set to Amps V A or it may be set as a percentage of the ASD rating The name plated FLA of the motor may be entered directly when Amps is selected as the unit of measurement see F701 to change the display unit Electronic Thermal Protection settings 1 4 will be displayed in Amps if the EOI display units are set to V A rather than F181 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 0 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 10 0 Maximum 100 0 Units HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F183 F192 V f Adjustment Coefficient Direct Access Number F183 Program gt Special Control Parameters gt Special Parameters gt V f Parameter Type Numerical Adjustment Coefficient Factory Default 32 This parameter may be used in the Constant Torque or the Variable Torque Changeable During Run Yes modes only and should be adjusted gradually to improve the application Minimum 0 specific torque requirements The Torque Boost setting F016 may be adjusted Maximum 255 to improve the low frequency torque performance Note The Torque Boost setting should be adjusted gradually before attempting performance corrections using this parameter Custom V f Five Point Setting 1 Frequency Direct Access Number
260. rage locations with extreme temperatures rapid temperature changes high humidity moisture dust corrosive gases or metal particles The storage temperature range of the HX7 ASD is 32 to 104 F 0 to 40 C DO NOT store the unit in places that are exposed to outside weather conditions i e wind rain snow etc Store in an upright position Disposal Never dispose of electrical components via incineration Contact your state environmental agency for details on disposal of electrical components and packaging in your area HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual 3 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Personnel Protection Installation operation and maintenance shall be performed by Qualified Personnel Only A thorough understanding of the HX7 ASD will be required before the installation operation or maintenance of the HX7 ASD A WARNING A Rotating machinery and live conductors can be hazardous and shall not come into contact with humans Personnel should be protected from all rotating machinery and electrical hazards at all times Insulators machine guards and electrical safeguards may fail or be defeated by the purposeful or inadvertent actions of workers Insulators machine guards and electrical safeguards are to be inspected and tested where possible at installation and periodically after installation for potential hazardous conditions
261. rameters Feedback Settings Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 50 00 This parameter determines the maximum amount that the feedback may Changeable During Run Yes increase the output signal Minimum 0 00 Maximum 50 00 Units Lower Deviation Limits Direct Access Number F365 Program gt Feedback Parameters gt Feedback Settings Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 50 00 This parameter determines the maximum amount that the feedback may Changeable During Run Yes decrease the output signal Minimum 0 00 Maximum 50 00 Units Feedback Settings Differential D Gain Direct Access Number F366 Program Feedback Parameters gt Feedback Settings Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 This parameter determines the degree that the Differential function affects the Ch ble During R x output signal The larger the value entered here the more pronounced the affect eer e See of the differential function for a given feedback signal level Minimum 0 0 Maximum 2 55 Number of PG Input Pulses Direct Access Number F367 Program Feedback Parameters gt PG Settings Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 500 This parameter is used to set the end of travel range when using an encoder on wide e Bape Changeable During Run No a motor driven positioning system e g hoist crane etc Minimum 1 Maximum 9999 Units Pulse Count HX7 AS
262. rces may be placed into the override mode using communications The source of the Frequency control signal may be selected by e The F004 setting e Placing an item from the list below in the Override mode via communications or e Placing the EOI in the Local mode places only the RS232 RS485 or Common Serial in the Override mode Possible Frequency control source selections include the following e Communication Card e RS232 RS485 e Common Serial TTL e LED Keypad e Control Terminal Strip default setting or e 004 setting used if no other items are in the Override mode Note The Control Terminal Strip is placed in the Override mode by assigning a discrete terminal to VI II Terminal Priority and connecting the terminal to CC Once the discrete terminal is activated VI IT is used as the Control Terminal Strip Override control item HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual 25 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Command and Frequency Control Selections The user may select only one Command source and only one source for Frequency control The default settings for Command and Frequency control are Use Control Terminal Strip and Use RR respectively The HX7 ASD has a command register for each item listed as a Command or Frequency source The registers store the Override setting for each control source The registers are continuously scanned to determine i
263. re Count 161 RS485 12 Run Frequency 30 91 Run Frequency Hysteresis 91 Run Key 18 Run LED 18 RX 8 10 31 RX Bias Adjust 124 RX Gain Adjust 125 RX Input Speed Control Setup 81 RX Input Torque Control Setup 81 RX Speed Frequency 1 82 RX Speed Frequency 2 82 RX Speed Reference 1 81 RX Speed Reference 2 82 RX Torque Reference Setpoint 1 82 RX Torque Reference Setpoint 2 83 RX2 31 RX2 Bias Adjust 125 RX2 Gain Adjust 125 RX2 Input Speed Control Setup 84 RX2 Input Torque Control Setup 84 RX2 Speed Frequency 1 85 RX2 Speed Frequency 2 85 RX2 Speed Reference 1 84 RX2 Speed Reference 2 85 RX2 Torque Reference Setpoint 1 85 RX2 Torque Reference Setpoint 2 86 S S1 8 9 S1 S4 Input Terminal Delay 64 S1 Input Terminal Assignment 58 S2 8 9 S2 Input Terminal Assignment 58 S3 8 9 S3 Input Terminal Assignment 58 S4 8 9 S4 Input Terminal Assignment 59 S5 S16 Input Terminal Delay 64 S5 Input Terminal Assignment 59 S6 Input Terminal Assignment 59 S7 Input Terminal Assignment 60 Scrolling Monitor Select 42 Service Life Information 6 183 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Short Circuit Detect Pulse 37 Short Circuit Test 145 Short Circuit Test Duration 145 Sink Source Error 175 Soft Stall 51 Soft Stall Enable 37 Soft Start 37 S pattern 1 129 S pattern 2 129 S Patter
264. rect Access Number F161 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 2 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 2 0 Maximum 200 0 Units mS HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F162 F166 FL Off Delay Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters Output Terminal Delays gt FL This parameter delays the opening of the FL output terminals by the programmed value see waveforms at F160 The delay may be increased to allow the devices that are connected to FL to respond Direct Access Number F162 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 2 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 2 0 Maximum 200 0 Units mS OUT4 Off Delay Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters Output Terminal Delays gt OUT4 This parameter delays the opening of the OUT4 output terminals by the programmed value see waveforms at F160 The delay may be increased to allow the devices that are connected to OUT4 to respond F163 Parameter Type Numerical Direct Access Number Factory Default 2 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 2 0 Maximum 200 0 Units mS OUTS Off Delay Program Terminal Selection Parameters Output Terminal Delays gt OUT5 This parameter delays the opening of the OUTS output terminals by the programmed value see waveforms
265. rection Changeable During Run No 119 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 120 Program gt Torque Setting Parameters Torque Speed Limiting The system has the ability to limit the amount that the speed may vary as a function of a changing load while operating in the Torque Control mode This parameter sets the response time of the system to torque change requirements F430 F433 Speed Limit torque Reference Direct Access Number F430 Program gt Torque Setting Parameters gt Torque Speed Limiting Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default None The system has the ability to limit the amount that the speed may vary as a Ch ble During R y function of a changing load while operating in the Torque Control mode This i i AUI a parameter sets the input terminal that will be used to control the allowable speed variance Settings None VIAL RR RX RX2 option Fixed Speed Limit Torque Level Direct Access Number F431 Program Torque Setting Parameters gt Torque Speed Limiting Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 The system has the ability to limit the amount that the speed may vary as a 3 function of a changing load while operating in the Torque Control mode This Changeable During Sun Yes parameter sets the targeted speed The plus or minus value range for this Minimum 0 00 setting may be set at F432 Maximum
266. rence 1 F222 the input signal level that represents RX2 Speed Frequency 1 e Set RX2 Speed Frequency 1 F223 e Set RX2 Speed Reference 2 F224 the input signal level that represents RX2 Speed Frequency 2 e Set RX2 Speed Frequency 2 F225 Provide a Run command F and or R Once set as the RX2 input changes the output frequency of the ASD will vary in accordance with the above settings This parameter sets RX2 Speed Reference 1 and is the input signal level that is associated with the setting of RX2 Speed Frequency 1 while operating in the Speed Control mode RX2 Input Torque Control Setup Direct Access Number F222 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 00 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 100 0 Maximum 100 0 Units Frequency Settings A Dutput Frequency l F223 Fees 1 Hz RX Speed Frequency 2 Hz Note The speed control response may be further trimmed by adjusting the Bias and Gain settings Torque Settings Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Torque control input at the RX2 input terminal e Program gt Fundamental Parameters gt Standard Mode Selection gt Frequency Mode 1 gt RX2 e Program gt Fundamental Parameters gt Standard Mode Selection gt Command Mode gt Use Control Terminal Strip e Set RX2 Speed Reference 1 F222 the input signal level that represents R
267. rent Bus Voltage Shows the instantaneous DC bus voltage as a percentage of the rating of the ASD or as a voltage Output Voltage Shows the instantaneous output voltage as a percentage of the rating of the ASD or as a voltage Input Terminals Shows the status of the discrete input terminals Output Terminals Shows the status of the discrete output terminals Timer Displays the accumulated run time since the last reset or power up of the ASD Post Compensation Frequency Displays the output frequency of the ASD after the application of the waveform adjustment compensation for changes in the input voltage Feedback Instantaneous Displays the instantaneous PID feedback value Feedback 1 Second Displays the filtered PID feedback value Torque Displays the torque output Torque Reference Displays the commanded torque Torque Current Displays the torque current Excitation Current Displays the excitation current PID Value Displays the instantaneous PID feedback value Motor Overload Displays the relationship of time to the magnitude of the motor overload as a ratio A higher overload means a shorter run time in this condition ASD Overload Displays the relationship of time to the magnitude of the ASD overload as a ratio A higher overload means a shorter run time in this condition DBR Overload Not used Displays the relationship of time to the magnitude of the DBR overload a
268. rent to control speed The larger the value entered here the more sensitive the drive is to changes in the received feedback Direct Access Number F374 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD dependent Changeable During Run No Minimum 100 0 Maximum 1000 Current Control Integral Gain Program Feedback Parameters gt PG Settings This parameter sets the degree and rate at which the output frequency will be allowed to change when prompted by changes in the output current The larger the value entered here the quicker more the drive responds to changes in feedback Direct Access Number F375 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD dependent Changeable During Run No Minimum 100 0 Maximum 1250 Speed Loop Proportional Gain Program Feedback Parameters gt PG Settings This parameter sets the Proportional Gain sensitivity of the drive when monitoring the PG signal to control speed The larger the value entered here the more sensitive the drive is to changes in the received feedback and the quicker it responds Direct Access Number F376 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 3 2 Maximum 1000 Speed Loop Integral Gain Program Feedback Parameters gt PG Settings This parameter sets the response time of the Speed Loop Integral Gain The smaller the value here the more pro
269. revent relay chatter Direct Access Number F152 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 2 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 2 0 Maximum 200 0 Units mS OUT4 On Delay Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters Output Terminal Delays gt OUT4 This parameter delays the closing of the OUT4 output terminals by the programmed value see waveforms at F150 The delay may be increased to prevent relay chatter HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual F153 Parameter Type Numerical Direct Access Number Factory Default 2 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 2 0 Maximum 200 0 Units mS 65 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Program Terminal Selection Parameters Output Terminal Delays OUT1 This parameter delays the opening of the OUT1 A amp C output terminals by the programmed value The delay may be increased to allow the devices that are connected to OUT1 to respond Hff Delay Time FF Condition is Met _ pen Contacts F154 F161 OUT5 On Delay Direct Access Number F154 Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters Output Terminal Delays Parameter Type Numerical OUTS Factory Default 2 0 This parameter delays the closing of the OUTS output terminals by the Changeable During Run No pr
270. ria Direct Access Number F640 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Units HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F641 F651 Earth Fault Alarm Time Direct Access Number F641 Program gt Protection gt Earth Fault Alarm Time Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 1 00 In the event that the Earth Fault Alarm activation criteria is met a timer Ch ble Durine R Ye begins to count down to zero Upon reaching zero the Earth Fault Alarm is PERSO geese ee activated Minimum 0 00 This parameter sets the start time of the count down timer Maximum 2 50 Units Seconds Earth Fault Trip Level Direct Access Number F642 Program Protection gt Earth Fault Trip Level Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 This parameter sets the threshold level that must be exceeded to meet the Ch ble Durine R y Earth Fault Trip activation criteria e ane eee ee Minimum 0 00 Maximum 100 Units Earth Fault Trip Time Direct Access Number F643 Program Protection gt Earth Fault Trip Time Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 1 00 In the event that the Earth Fault Trip activation criteria is met a timer begins Ch ble Durine R y to count down to zero Upon reaching zero the Earth Fault
271. ring Run Yes AM Terminal Adjustment Program Meter Terminal Adjustment Parameters gt AM This function is used to calibrate the AM analog output terminal To calibrate the AM analog output connect a meter current or voltage as described at F670 With the drive running at a known frequency adjust this parameter F671 until the running frequency produces the desired DC level output at the AM terminal Direct Access Number F671 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 512 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 1 Maximum 1280 Analog 1 Terminal Setting Program gt Meter Terminal Adjustment Parameters gt Analog 1 This parameter sets the Analog 1 multifunction programmable terminal to 1 of 33 possible functions and is available on the ASD Multicom option board only Possible assignments for this output terminal are listed in Table 6 on pg 166 Direct Access Number F672 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Output Voltage Changeable During Run Yes Analog 1 Terminal Adjustment Program gt Meter Terminal Adjustment Parameters gt Analog 1 This parameter adjusts the coefficient of the Analog 1 circuit to obtain an output that corresponds with a known input This function is used in the calibration of external signal measuring devices DVM counters etc F673 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 512 Direct Access Number Changeab
272. rmines the forward reverse setting for the 3 Preset Speed F020 Settings Forward Reverse Direct Access Number F383 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Forward Changeable During Run No Preset Speed Direction 4 Program gt Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Preset Speeds Determines the forward reverse setting for the 4 Preset Speed F021 Settings Forward Reverse Direct Access Number F384 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Forward Changeable During Run No Preset Speed Direction 5 Program gt Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Preset Speeds Determines the forward reverse setting for the 5 Preset Speed F022 Settings Forward Reverse Direct Access Number F385 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Forward Changeable During Run No Preset Speed Direction 6 Program gt Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Preset Speeds Determines the forward reverse setting for the 6 Preset Speed F023 Settings Forward Reverse Direct Access Number F386 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Forward Changeable During Run No Preset Speed Direction 7 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Preset Speeds Determines the forward reverse setting for the 7 Preset Speed F024 Settings Forward Reverse Direct Access Number F387 Parameter Type Selecti
273. rn Run This parameter allows the user to run the Preset Speeds 1 15 as a group and is identified as Group 1 Skip may be selected to ignore a Preset Speed entry See F520 for further information on this setting F531 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default 1 Changeable During Run No Group 1 Speed 2 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Speeds Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 F532 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default 2 Changeable During Run No Group 1 Speed 3 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Speeds Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 F533 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default 3 Changeable During Run No Group 1 Speed 4 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Speeds Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 F534 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default 4 Changeable During Run No 134 Group 1 Speed 5 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Speeds Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 F535 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default 5 Changeable During Run No HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiauto
274. rol mode Direct Access Number F225 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 80 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum Max Freq F011 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz RX2 Torque Reference Setpoint 1 Program gt Torque Setting Parameters gt Setpoints gt RX2 This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX2 input terminal when the RX2 terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Torque Control mode This is accomplished by establishing an associated V f output pattern for a given RX2 input level See RX2 Speed Reference 1 for further information on this setting This parameter sets RX2 Torque Reference Setpoint 1 and is the output torque value that is associated with the setting of RX2 Speed Reference 1 while operating in the Torque control mode HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual F226 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 250 00 Maximum 250 00 Units 85 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F227 F227 RX2 Torque Reference Setpoint 2 Direct Access Number F227 Program gt Torque Setting Parameters gt Setpoints gt RX2 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 00 This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX2 input terminal when the RX2 terminal
275. rom the Frequency Command screen to access this parameter Direct Access Number F721 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Decel Stop Changeable During Run Yes HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F723 F731 Torque Limit Group Direct Access Number F723 No path available Direct Access Only Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 1 While operating using the LED Keypad Option this parameter is used to select Ch ble Durine R y 1 of 4 preset positive torque limits to apply to the active motor The settings of See TUME NUN iTe profiles 1 4 may be setup at F441 F444 F446 and F448 respectively Settings 1 2 3 4 Note If using the LCD EOL press ESC from the Frequency Command screen to access this parameter Feedback in Panel Mode Direct Access Number F724 No path available Direct Access Only Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Enabled While operating using the LED Keypad Option this parameter Enables Ch ble During R yi Disables PID feedback control ANEREN TANIE en Te Settings Enabled Disabled Note Ifusing the LCD EOL press ESC from the Frequency Command screen to access this parameter LED Option Override Multiplication Gain Direct Access Number F729 Program gt Feedback Parameters gt Override Control Parameter Type Numerical Fac
276. rque Control Setup 74 VI II Speed Frequency 1 75 VI II Speed Frequency 2 75 VIAI Speed Reference 1 74 VIAI Speed Reference 2 75 VI I Torque Reference Setpoint 1 75 VI I Torque Reference Setpoint 2 76 Viewing Trip Information 176 Voltage Compensation Coefficient for Dead Time 127 Voltage Vector Control 126 Volts per Hertz 22 W W Phase OC 175 Wizard Finish 23 185 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net
277. rther information on this parameter Direct Access Number F290 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum Lower Limit F013 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz Preset Speed 12 Program gt Pattern Run Control gt Preset Speeds gt 12 This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 1100 and is identified as Preset Speed 12 The binary number is applied to S1 S4 of the Control Terminal Strip to output the Preset Speed see F018 for further information on this parameter Direct Access Number F291 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum Lower Limit F013 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz Preset Speed 13 Program gt Pattern Run Control gt Preset Speeds gt 13 This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 1101 and is identified as Preset Speed 13 The binary number is applied to S1 S4 of the Control Terminal Strip to output the Preset Speed see F018 for further information on this parameter Direct Access Number F292 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum Lower Limit F013 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz Preset Speed 14 Program Pattern Run Control gt Preset Speeds gt 14 This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 1110 and is id
278. rtional to the magnitude of the function assigned to this terminal The available assignments for this output terminal are listed in Table 6 on pg 166 Changeable During Run Yes Note To read voltage at this terminal a 100 500Q resistor is required and it must be connected from FM to FM The voltage is read across the 100 500Q resistor Current may be read by connecting an ammeter from FM to FM The FM analog output has a maximum resolution of 1 1024 The FM Terminal Adjustment F006 must be used to calibrate the output signal for a proper response SW 2 may be switched to allow for the full range output to be either 0 1 mA or 4 20 mA when providing an output current or either 0 1 or 1 7 5 volts when providing an output voltage at this terminal FM Terminal Adjustment Direct Access Number F006 Program gt Meter Terminal Adjustment Parameters gt FM Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 512 This function is used to calibrate the FM analog output terminal Changeable During Run Yes To calibrate the FM analog output connect a meter current or voltage as described at F005 With the drive running at a known frequency adjust this parameter F006 until the running frequency produces the desired DC level Maximum 1280 output at the FM terminal Minimum 0 Type Reset Direct Access Number F007 Program gt Utility Parameters gt Type Reset Paramete
279. s Seconds Electronic Thermal Protection 1 Program Motor Parameters Motor Set 1 The Motor 1 Electronic Thermal Protection parameter specifies the motor overload current level for motor set 1 This value is entered as either a percentage of the full load rating of the ASD or as the FLA of the motor The unit of measurement for this parameter may be set to Amps or it may be set as a percentage of the ASD rating The name plated FLA of the motor may be entered directly when Amps is selected as the unit of measurement see F701 to change the display unit Electronic Thermal Protection settings 1 4 will be displayed in Amps if the EOI display units are set to V A rather than Direct Access Number F600 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 10 0 Maximum 100 0 Units Overcurrent Stall Level Program Protection Parameters Stall This parameter specifies the output current level at which the output frequency is reduced in an attempt to prevent a trip The overcurrent level is entered as a percentage of the maximum rating of the drive Note Parameter F017 Soft Stall must be enabled to use this feature F601 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD dependent Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 200 0 Units 142 Trip Save at Power Down Enable Pr
280. s a ratio A higher overload means a shorter run time in this condition 30 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Motor Load Shows the instantaneous motor load requirements ASD Load Shows the instantaneous load placed on the ASD DBR Load Not used Shows the instantaneous load placed on the DBR Input Power Shows the instantaneous input power level to the ASD Output Power Shows the instantaneous output power level of the ASD Peak Current Shows the highest current level achieved since the last startup or reset This value is displayed as a percentage of the full rating of the ASD or as an amperage Peak Voltage Shows the highest voltage level achieved since the last startup or reset This value is displayed as a percentage of the full rating of the ASD or as an amperage PG Speed Shows the instantaneous speed as detected by the shaft mounted encoder Direction Shows the direction of the motor rotation PG Position Shows the instantaneous PG position as detected by the shaft mounted encoder RR Displays the RR input as a percentage of its full range VI II Displays the VI II input as a percentage of the full range of the VI II value Note The VI II input represents two analog inputs The VI input is used for a 0 10 VDC analog signal and the II input is used for current loop applica
281. sbessesveuss ENEK EKE KESSE EESPERE EEEE Esk 16 Electronic Operator Interface cccsssscsssscecesscssccsssccsssscessssscccsscecesssessssescsssessssssees 17 EOI Features inier heh nen En eE ENEE NR NI NEREA bie ER E AEAEE 17 EOLOPETATION epitr ririo doce sagevs TEE E EEE AEE EE RTE E S 18 System Operation cscsccsscecseccssssscssssscesesessssesssssessseesesesscsssessssscssessssssessnessesensseess 19 Operation LOAD iis c sccccssscccescesctuscaette cpchvenayaeascnssbdecpoveys NSPE EEE EE EEEE EEE OEO 19 Default Setting Change Ss cist scshchacscotoctessteceschesesstesscocssdtesatessbustseuteveusterevedeesidenvedtevets 19 Startup Wizard Requirements e sesseseesesseeoesesoesesoeseeeeeoeseeoeseeoonseeoesesonsesoeeoreeeeeseeeeseeeeee 21 Command Mode and Frequency Mode Control ssecssesoesseccoesoesooecsoesoesooesoesossosesoeseses 24 Command Control F003 c ccccseceesceeesseecseeeeceneeceseeecesaeeeseeeesesuecesenaeessueeessseeeneas 24 Frequency Control E00 iecsnsonn tet chee E ERRARE ER IEE E 25 Command and Frequency Control Selections seseeeesseessereersreersrrererrsreerereee 26 Override Operation eiie a E E E RAEE AA 27 Command and Frequency Control Override Hierarchy 27 Command Control Selections isccscricivecsesceescevsveceshtveveesasedscus ivbabee e e 27 Frequency Control SeleCtr Ons ices scsssasss sesgesssonduaesessnpeteevsoanpessvosnsefeecepseadnstsenseeiy gt 28 System Configuration and Menu Options
282. sets the output frequency of the drive during a Jog Jogging is the term used to describe turning the motor on for small increments of time and is used when precise positioning of motor driven equipment is required Minimum 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Enabling the Jog Window allows for the Manual Jog window to be among the Maximum 20 00 screens accessed during repeated MON PRG entries This screen must be Units Hz displayed when Jogging using the EOI The Jog function may be initiated from the EOI or remotely via the Control Terminal Strip or using Communications for further information on using Communications for Jogging see the Communications manual To perform a Jog set this parameter F260 to the desired Jog frequency Select a Jog Stop method F261 Jog Setup Using the EOI To initiate a Jog from the EOI perform the following 1 Place a check in the Enable Jog Window box Program gt Frequency Setting Parameters gt Jog Settings gt Enable Jog Window Note The Jog Window must be displayed on the EOI to perform the Jog function using the EOI 2 Press MON PRG to access the Jog Window 3 Using the Up Down arrow keys of the EOI select Reverse or Forward 4 Place the system in the Local mode Local Remote LED is on 5 Press and hold the Run key for the desired Jog duration Jog Setup Using the Control Terminal Strip To initiate a Jog from the Control Terminal Strip perform the following 1
283. setting the ASD will output 0 Hz to the motor Minimum 0 0 Maxi 5 Note This setting will override the Startup Frequency setting F240 a if this setting has a higher value Units Hz HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual 91 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F250 F253 DC Injection Braking Start Frequency Program Protection Parameters DC Braking During deceleration this is the frequency at which DC Injection braking will start DC Injection Braking DC Injection Braking is a braking system used with three phase motors Unlike conventional brakes there is no physical contact between the rotating shaft and a stationary brake pad or drum When braking is required the drive outputs a DC current that is applied to the windings of the motor to quickly brake the motor The braking current stops when the time entered in F252 times out The intensity of the DC current used while braking determines how fast the motor will come to a stop and may be set at F251 The intensity setting is entered as a percentage of the full load current of the ASD DC Injection Braking is also used to preheat the motor or to keep the rotor from spinning freely when the motor is off by providing a pulsating DC current into the motor at the Carrier Frequency This feature may be enabled at F254 Direct Access Number F250 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default
284. ss Number F340 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 250 Units HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F341 F356 Frequency for Automatic High Speed Operation at Light Load Program gt Special Control Parameters Crane Hoist Settings gt Express Speed Settings Frequency for Automatic High Speed Operation at Light Load This parameter establishes the speed that the ASD will ramp to when operating in the Light Load High Speed mode F341 Parameter Type Numerical Direct Access Number Factory Default 80 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 80 00 Units On Trip Powerline Switching Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters gt Line Power Switching This parameter Enables Disables the On Trip Powerline Switching feature When enabled the system is instructed to discontinue using the output of the drive and to switch to the commercial power in the event of a trip Settings Disabled Enabled box checked F354 Parameter Type Check Box Direct Access Number Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run No At Frequency Powerline Switching Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters gt Line Power Switching When enabled this parameter sets the frequency
285. t 1 0 This parameter is used to control the load inertia during speed changes Ch ble During R Y Acceleration and deceleration overshoot may be reduced by increasing this i a a a aca value Minimum 0 0 This setting motor tuning is required to use the Vector Control Automatic Maximum 100 0 Torque Boost or Automatic Energy saving functions Motor Constant 5 leakage inductance Direct Access Number F410 Program Motor Parameters Vector Motor Model This parameter provides slight increases in the output voltage of the drive at the high speed range This setting motor tuning is required to use the Vector Control Automatic Torque Boost or Automatic Energy saving functions Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD dependent Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 00 Maximum 650 0 Number of Poles of Motor Program Motor Parameters gt Motor Settings This parameter identifies the number of motor poles Direct Access Number F411 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 4 Changeable During Run No Minimum 2 Maximum 16 Motor Capacity Program Motor Parameters gt Motor Settings This parameter identifies the wattage rating of the motor Direct Access Number F412 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD dependent Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 10 Maximum ASD dependent Units kW Motor Type Program
286. t 100 00 This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX input terminal when the RX terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Torque Changeable During Run Yes Control mode Minimum 250 00 This is accomplished by establishing an associated V f output pattern for a Maximum 250 00 given RX input level Units See RX Speed Reference 1 for further information on this setting This parameter sets RX Torque Reference Setpoint 2 and is the output torque value that is associated with setting of RX Speed Reference 2 while operating in the Torque control mode HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual 83 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F222 F222 RX2 Speed Reference 1 Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints gt RX2 This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX2 input terminal when the RX2 terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode or the Torque Control mode RX2 Input Speed Control Setup Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Speed control input at the RX2 input terminal e Program gt Fundamental Parameters gt Standard Mode Selection gt Frequency Mode 1 gt RX2 e Program gt Fundamental Parameters gt Standard Mode Selection gt Command Mode gt Use Control Terminal Strip e Set RX2 Speed Refe
287. t System Configuration and Menu Options Root Menus The MON PRG key is used to access the three root menus of the HX7 ASD the Frequency Command screen the Monitor screen and the Program screen From either mode press the MON PRG key to loop through to the other modes see Figure 17 In the event of a fault the HX7 ASD displays the fault screen and provides an on screen indication of the fault type The Fault screen remains in the MON PRG screen rotation see Figure 17 until the source of the fault is removed and the ASD is reset Figure 17 Root Menu Mapping Fault Gou Fault Frequency MON PRG MON PRG MON PRG Display Alarm Fault g Command Monitor Program Screens Screen Screen Screen ESE ESC ESC Active Fault il ESCHMON PRG Yes Hasit Panel Menu Screen Not shown during an active fault Frequency Command Screen Frequency Setting While operating in the Local mode Local LED is illuminated on the EOD the running frequency of the motor may be set from the Frequency Command screen Using the Rotary Encoder enter the desired Frequency Command value press the Enter key and then press the Run key The motor will run at the Frequency Command speed and may be changed while running The Frequency Command screen is not displayed during an active trip Figure 18 Frequency Command Screen Alarm dis
288. t 151 Frequency Override Multiplying Input 151 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Frequency Point Selection 159 Frequency Reference 30 Frequency Reference Source 23 Frequency Setting 29 32 Frequency Setting Parameters 35 Fundamental 32 Fuse 172 Fwd Rev Disable 36 G Gate Array Error 173 General Safety Information 1 GND Fault 173 Group 1 Speed 1 134 Group 1 Speed 2 134 Group 1 Speed 3 134 Group 1 Speed 4 134 Group 1 Speed 5 134 Group 1 Speed 6 135 Group 1 Speed 7 135 Group 1 Speed 8 135 Group 1 Speed Repeat Factor 134 Group 2 Speed 1 135 Group 2 Speed 2 135 Group 2 Speed 3 135 Group 2 Speed 4 135 Group 2 Speed 5 135 Group 2 Speed 6 135 Group 2 Speed 7 136 Group 2 Speed 8 136 Group 2 Speed Repeat Factor 135 Group 3 Speed 1 136 Group 3 Speed 2 136 Group 3 Speed 3 136 Group 3 Speed 4 136 Group 3 Speed 5 136 Group 3 Speed 6 136 Group 3 Speed 7 136 Group 3 Speed 8 137 Group 3 Speed Repeat Factor 136 Group 4 Speed 1 137 Group 4 Speed 2 137 Group 4 Speed 3 137 Group 4 Speed 4 137 Group 4 Speed 5 137 Group 4 Speed 6 137 Group 4 Speed 7 137 Group 4 Speed 8 137 Group 4 Speed Repeat Factor 137 179 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net H Handling and Storage 3 Heavy Load Torque During Forward Accel
289. t Settings This parameter provides a value for the Power Running Torque Limit 1 setting if Setting is selected at F440 This value provides the positive torque upper limit for the 1 motor Direct Access Number F441 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 250 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 250 0 Units Regeneration Torque Limit 1 Program gt Torque Setting Parameters gt Torque Limit Settings This parameter determines the source of the Regenerative Torque Limit control signal If Setting is selected the value set at F443 is used for this parameter Settings VII RR RX RX2 option Setting Direct Access Number F442 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Setting Changeable During Run Yes Regeneration Torque Limit Setting 1 Program gt Torque Setting Parameters gt Torque Limit Settings gt Manual Settings This parameter provides a value to be used as the Regeneration Torque Limit 1 if Setting is selected at F442 Direct Access Number F443 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 250 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 250 0 Units Driving Torque Limit 2 Program gt Torque Setting Parameters gt Manual Torque Limit Settings This parameter is used to set the positive torque upper limit for the 2 motor profile when multiple motors are controlled by a single drive or whe
290. t is proportional to the output frequency of the drive Direct Access Number F702 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 200 0 Units Hz UDU Frequency Display Resolution Program gt Utility Parameters gt Display Units The parameter sets the number of decimal places to be displayed during non Accel Decel functions HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F703 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 1 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 1 Maximum 0 01 153 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F704 F721 Accel Decel Special Display Resolution Program gt Special Control Parameters gt Accel Decel Special This parameter sets the number of decimal places to be displayed for Accel Decel functions Direct Access Number F704 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 1 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 1 Maximum 0 01 Prohibit Initializing User Parameters During Typeform Initialization Program gt Special Control Parameters gt Special Parameters gt Prohibit Initializing User Parameters During Typeform Initialization This parameter Enables Disables the ability to initialize user parameters during a Type Form initialization Settings Allowed Prohibited Direct Access
291. t Vector Control mode Direct Access Number F482 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 90 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 80 0 Maximum 300 0 Units Voltage Vector Control Program gt Special Control Parameters gt Special Parameters gt Control Margin Modulation gt Voltage Vector Control This parameter establishes the control margin of modulation while operating in the Voltage Vector Control mode Direct Access Number F483 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 105 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 80 0 Maximum 300 0 Units Constant Vector Control Program Special Control Parameters gt Special Parameters gt Control Margin Modulation gt Voltage Vector Control This parameter establishes the control margin of modulation while operating in the Constant Vector Control mode Direct Access Number F484 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 105 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 80 0 Maximum 300 0 Units Stall Cooperation Gain at Field Weakening Zone Program gt Special Control Parameters gt Special Parameters Stall Cooperation Gain at Field Weakening Zone This parameter determines the degree that the Stall function is effective while operating the motor in the field weakening zone Direct Access Number F485 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 128 Changeable During Run
292. t is used to determine if the Light Load High Speed F331 operation may engage or remain engaged if active If the Light Load High Speed operation is terminated normal operation resumes Direct Access Number F338 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 50 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 250 Units Heavy Load Torque During Reverse Acceleration Program gt Special Control Parameters Crane Hoist Settings gt Express Speed Settings Heavy Load Torque During Reverse Acceleration During reverse acceleration this parameter establishes the threshold torque level that is used to determine if the Light Load High Speed F331 operation may engage or remain engaged if active If the Light Load High Speed operation is terminated normal operation resumes Direct Access Number F339 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 150 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 250 Units Heavy Load Torque During Reverse Deceleration Program Special Control Parameters Crane Hoist Settings gt Express Speed Settings Heavy Load Torque During Reverse Deceleration During reverse deceleration this parameter establishes the threshold torque level that is used to determine if the Light Load High Speed F331 operation may engage or remain engaged if active If the Light Load High Speed operation is terminated normal operation resumes 106 Direct Acce
293. t terminals to Binary Bit s 0 7 or 0 MSB see Table 5 on pg 162 The binary input can control the direction speed and or torque of the motor Note 255p is the decimal equivalent of the 8 bit BIN word with all input terminals set to one 255 decimal 11111111 binary BIN Speed Control Setup Set BIN Speed Reference 1 F228 the input signal that represents BIN Speed Frequency 1 e Set BIN Speed Frequency 1 F229 Set BIN Speed Reference 2 F230 the input signal that represents BIN Speed Frequency 2 e Set BIN Speed Frequency 2 F231 Provide a Run command F and or R Once set as the binary input signal changes the output signal of the ASD will vary in accordance with the above settings This parameter sets BIN Speed Reference 1 and is the input signal that is associated with the setting of BIN Speed Frequency 1 while operating in the Speed Control mode BIN Torque Control Setup Set BIN Speed Reference 1 F228 the input signal level that represents BIN Torque Reference Setpoint 1 e Set BIN Torque Reference Setpoint 1 F232 e Set BIN Speed Reference 2 F230 the input signal level that represents BIN Torque Reference Setpoint 2 Set BIN Torque Reference Setpoint 2 F233 Provide a Run command F and or R Once set as the binary input signal changes the output signal of the ASD will vary in accordance with the above settings This paramete
294. tartup into a spinning motor The Lock On Rate is the difference between the time that the RPM of the motor is determined by the ASD and the time that the ASD outputs a drive signal to the motor See F301 for additional information on this parameter F313 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD dependent Direct Access Number Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 50 Maximum 2 50 Search Method Program Protection Parameters Retry Restart In the event of a momentary power outage this parameter may be used to set the starting point frequency of the scanning signal that is used to determine the rotor speed or this parameter may be used to select the method used to search for the speed of the rotor See F301 and F312 for additional information on this parameter Settings Normal Start from 0 0 Hz Start from Running Frequency Option Board ASD SS PG F314 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default Normal Changeable During Run No 102 Search Inertia Program Protection Parameters Retry Restart After a momentary power loss or the momentary loss of the ST to CC connection this parameter sets the time for the commanded torque to reach its programmed setting during the automatic restart This function is in effect so long as the Retry Restart feature is enabled at F301 Settings 0 5 Sec fast 1 0 Sec standard 1 5 Sec
295. tection settings 1 4 will be displayed in Amps if the EOI display units are set to V A rather than HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F177 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 10 0 Maximum 100 0 Units 69 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F178 F181 Motor 4 Base Frequency Program gt Motor Parameters gt Motor Set 4 The Motor 4 Base Frequency setting is the frequency at which the output voltage of the ASD reaches its maximum setting The Maximum Output Voltage is set at F179 This parameter is used only when the parameters for motor set 4 are configured and selected Motor set 4 may be selected by a properly configured input terminal For proper motor operation the Base Frequency should be set for the name plated frequency of the motor F178 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 60 0 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 25 0 Maximum 299 0 Units Hz Motor 4 Max Output Voltage Program gt Motor Parameters gt Motor Set 4 The Motor 3 Maximum Output Voltage is the Motor 4 output voltage at the Base Frequency F178 Regardless of the programmed value the output voltage cannot be higher than the input voltage The actual output voltage will be influenced by th
296. the binary input when the discrete input terminals are used as the control input while operating in the Torque Control mode This is accomplished by establishing an associated V f output pattern for a given binary input signal See BIN Speed Reference 1 for further information on this setting This parameter sets BIN Torque Reference Setpoint 2 and is the output torque value that is associated with setting of BIN Speed Reference 2 while operating in the Torque control mode F233 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 250 0 Maximum 250 0 Units PG Speed Reference 1 Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints gt PG This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the PG input terminal when a shaft mounted encoder is used as the feedback transducer while operating in the Speed Control mode Note The ASD Multicom Option Board and the HS35 Encoder is required for system operation using the PG input speed control PG Input Speed Control Setup Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Speed control input at the PG input terminal e Program gt Fundamental Parameters gt Standard Mode Selection gt Frequency Mode 1 gt Pulse Input Option e Program gt Fundamental Parameters gt Standard Mode Selection gt Command Mode gt any setting Set PG Speed Re
297. ting either VI II or RR enables this feature The selected input is used as a multiplier of the programmed Acceleration Time setting The multiplication factor may be from 1 to 10 Note An acceleration time shorter than the load will allow may cause nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads Settings Disabled VII RR Direct Access Number F652 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run Yes Deceleration Time Adjustment Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters gt Analog Input Functions This parameter Enables Disables the feature that allows for the external adjustment of the Deceleration Time Selecting either VIMI or RR enables this feature The selected input is used as a modifier of the programmed Deceleration Time setting Note A deceleration time shorter than the load will allow may cause nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads Settings Disabled VII RR F653 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run Yes 150 Torque Boost Adjustment Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters gt Analog Input Functions This parameter Enables Disables the feature that allows for the external adjustment of the Torque Boost setting Selecting either VI II or RR enables this feature The selected input is used as a modifier of the programmed Torque Boost setting Se
298. ting the input source to zero and either increasing or decreasing this setting to provide an output of zero from the ASD HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F470 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 255 123 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F471 F474 VI II Gain Adjust Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints gt VI II gt Gain This parameter is used to fine tune the gain of the VI II input terminals Note See note on pg 50 for further information on the VI II terminal This setting may be used to ensure that the 100 level of the input source pot pressure transducer flow meter etc is also the 100 level setting of the ASD system This is accomplished by setting the input source to 100 and either increasing or decreasing this setting to provide an output of 100 from the ASD Direct Access Number F471 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 50 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 255 RR Bias Adjust Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints gt RR gt Bias This parameter is used to fine tune the bias of the RR input terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control or the Torque Control mode
299. tions such as with a 4 20 mA signal Either may be used as a frequency or torque command source however the two cannot function simultaneously RX Displays the RX input as a percentage of its full range RX2 Displays the RX2 input as a percentage of its full range FM Displays the FM output as a percentage of its full range AM Displays the AM output as a percentage of its full range Option Type TBD Option Terminal A TBD Option Terminal B TBD Option Terminal O TBD Option Terminal P TBD Maximum Output TBD Direction Displays the ASD Forward Reverse status not available at the Scrolling Monitor HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual 31 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Program Mode Table 4 lists the menu items of the Program mode and maps the flow of the menu selections The Parameter Numbers for the listed functions are provided where applicable The functions listed may be accessed and changed as mapped below or via the Direct Access method Program gt Direct Access gt Applicable Parameter Number Table 4 Program mode mapping Program Menu Navigation Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Parameici Number FUNDAMENTALS Maximum Frequency F011 Upper Limit F012 Frequency Setting
300. tory Default 0 00 If operating using the LED Keypad Option this parameter provides a value to Ch ble Durine R y be used in the event that Setting is selected for the Frequency Override Seek E EME RES Multiplying Input F661 Minimum 100 00 Maximum 100 00 LOD Control and Stopping Method Direct Access Number F731 Program gt Special Control Parameters gt Low Output Disable Function Parameter Type Selection List LOD Factory Default Disabled Enables Disables the Low Output Disable function and if enabled selects a Changeable During Run Yes stopping method Settings Disabled Enabled Decel Stop Enabled Coast Stop HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual 155 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 156 Program Special Control Parameters Low Output Disable Function gt LOD Restart Delay Time The Low Output Disable Restart Delay Time sets the time that once expired and all standard ASD requirements are met normal ASD operation resumes F732 F737 LOD Start Level Hz Direct Access Number F732 Program Special Control Parameters Low Output Disable Function Parameter Type Numerical LOD Start Level Hz Factory Default 0 0 The Low Output Disable Start Level sets the output frequency threshold that if Changeable During Run Yes exceeded will initiate the LOD function if properly configured Minimum
301. tory Default 100 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 100 0 Units VI II Speed Frequency 2 Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints gt VI II This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the VI II input terminal when the VI II terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode See VI II Speed Reference 1 for further information on this setting when used for Speed control This parameter sets the output frequency that is associated with VI II Speed Reference 2 setting while operating in the Speed control mode Direct Access Number F204 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 80 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz VI II Torque Reference Setpoint 1 Program gt Torque Setting Parameters gt Setpoints gt VIII This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the VI II input terminal when the VI II terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Torque Control mode This is accomplished by establishing an associated V f output pattern for a given VI II input level See VI II Speed Reference 1 for further information on this setting This parameter sets VI II Torque Reference Setpoint 1 and is the output torque value that is associated with the setting of VIAI Speed Reference 1 while operating in t
302. trip e Set VI II Speed Reference 1 F201 the input signal level that represents VI II Torque Reference Setpoint 1 e Set VI II Torque Reference Setpoint 1 F205 e Set VI II Speed Reference 2 F203 the input signal level that represents VI II Torque Reference Setpoint 2 F203 e CAD VII Speed Ref 1 F201 Output Frequency 1 Hz e VI II Speed Freq m 2 Hz F204 The default value for parameter F201 is 20 The II input is commonly used for the 4 20 mA current loop signal where 4 mA equals 20 of a 20 mA signal If the VI input is used 0 10 VDC input this parameter may be changed to 0 0 of the input signal The speed control response may be further trimmed by adjusting the Bias and Gain settings Torque Settings 0 0 Set VI II Torque Reference Setpoint 2 F206 1 C2 Provide a Run command F and or R ie Once set as the VI input voltage or the II current changes the output torque of the ASD will vary in accordance with the above settings This parameter sets VI II Speed Reference 1 and is the input signal level that is associated with the setting of VIMI Torque Reference Setpoint 1 while operating in the Torque Control mode 74 Output Torque VI II Torque Ref Setpoint 2 X F206 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email
303. tting when used for Speed control This parameter sets RR Speed Frequency 2 and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of RR Speed Reference 2 while operating in the Speed Control mode Direct Access Number F213 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 80 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz RR Torque Reference Setpoint 1 Program Torque Setting Parameters gt Setpoints RR This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RR input terminal when the RR terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Torque Control mode This is accomplished by establishing an associated V f output pattern for a given RR input level See RR Speed Reference 1 for further information on this setting This parameter sets RR Torque Reference Setpoint 1 and is the output torque value that is associated with the setting of RR Speed Reference 1 while operating in the Torque control mode HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F214 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 250 0 Units 79 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F215 F215 RR Torque Reference Setpoint 2 Direct Access Number F215 Program gt Torque Setting Parameters gt Setpoints gt R
304. ttings Disabled VII RR Direct Access Number F654 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run Yes HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F660 F661 Frequency Override Additive Input Program gt Feedback Parameters gt Override Control This parameter Enables Disables the feature that allows for the external adjustment of the Output Frequency Selecting either of the input methods listed enables this feature The selected input is used as a modifier of the programmed Output Frequency Settings Disabled VIAL RR RX RX2 option LED Keypad option Binary BCD Input Common Serial TTL RS232 RS485 Communication Card Motorized Pot Pulse Input 1 Direct Access Number F660 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run No Frequency Override Multiplying Input Program gt Feedback Parameters Override Control This parameter Enables Disables the feature that allows for the external adjustment of the Output Frequency Selecting either of the input methods listed enables this feature The selected input is used as a multiplier of the programmed Output Frequency If operating using the LED Keypad Option and Setting is selected the value entered at F729 is used as the multiplier Settings Disab
305. ual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Typical Connection Diagram Figure 14 HX7 ASD typical connection diagram Note When connecting multiple wires to the PA PB PC or PO terminals do not connect a solid wire and a stranded wire to the same terminal PO see AN FRE 2 E va ia Ly Po UL ia 5 S a S A E High w Voltage v 4 2 Dae s L2 aig oO T L3 mM A Motor Circuit Breaker CN7A Ln F g eead P N 48570 vS R Fe Reverse O ps o ST FLA 3 v Standby Q at RES FLBA A Reset Preset Speed 3 4 H H Q Preset Speed 1 H H i Preset Speed 2 zm De S4 c Emergency Off Q rs ccd iii Factory ue Input not Installed c Jumpers Signal 4 20 mA Ios FPO VI Input Signal 0 to 10 VDC ce Input Signal RX 10 to 10 VDC b Me w External m cee 0 i mA r AM lt gt Potentiometer 4 20 mA 1 to 10 k Ohm 4 W J m FM gt Cor voltage from FM gt O RR to CC 0 to 10 VDO Q RR G E DO NOT CONNECT CC TO EARTH GROUND HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual 15 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Startup and Test Before turning on the ASD ensure that e R L1 S L2 and T L3 are connected to the 3 phase input power e U T1 V T2 and W T3 are co
306. ue Limit 1 2 Switching Torque control may be switched between the Torque Limit 1 profile to the Torque Limit 2 profile if using a multiple profile configuration 162 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Table 5 Discrete Input Terminal Assignment Selections and Descriptions 17 Torque Limit 3 4 Switching Torque control may be switched between the Torque Limit 3 profile to the Torque Limit 4 profile if using a multiple profile configuration 18 PID Control Off Connecting this terminal to CC turns off PID control 19 Pattern 1 Connecting this terminal to CC initiates the Pattern 1 Pattern Run 20 Pattern 2 Connecting this terminal to CC initiates the Pattern 2 Pattern Run 21 Pattern 3 Connecting this terminal to CC initiates the Pattern 3 Pattern Run 22 Pattern 4 Connecting this terminal to CC initiates the Pattern 4 Pattern Run 23 Pattern Continue Continues with the last Pattern Run from its stopping point when connected to CC 24 Pattern Trigger This function is used to sequentially initiate each Preset Speed of a Pattern Run with each connection to CC 25 Forced Jog Forward This setting initiates a Forced Forward Jog when connected to CC The Forced Forward Jog command provides a forward run signal so long
307. uency 3 Bandwidth Direct Access Number F275 Program Special Control Parameters gt Jump Frequencies Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 This parameter establishes a plus or minus value for Jump Frequency 3 Changeable D ring Run Y s F274 Minimum 0 00 Maximum 30 0 Units Hz Jump Frequency Processing Direct Access Number F276 Program Special Control Parameters Jump Frequencies gt Jump Frequency Processing This parameter determines if the output frequency of the ASD or the PID feedback signal will be used as a reference for determining the Jump Frequency range See F270 for further information on the Jump Frequency settings Settings Process Amount use PID feedback Output Frequency Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Process Amount Changeable During Run Yes Preset Speed 8 Program Pattern Run Control gt Preset Speeds gt 8 This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 1000 and is identified as Preset Speed 8 The binary number is applied to S1 S4 of the Control Terminal Strip to output the Preset Speed see F018 for further information on this parameter F287 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum Lower Limit F013 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz Preset Speed 9 Program gt Pattern Run Control gt Preset
308. un time counter exceeded Type Reset required select Clear run timer Reset ignored if active HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual 169 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net EOI dtu Function Description Possible Causes Display OLI ASD Overload Load requirement in excess The carrier frequency is too high of the capability of the ASD Anexcessive load e Acceleration time is too short e DC damping rate is set too high e The motor is starting into a spinning load after a momentary power failure e The ASD is improperly matched to the application OLM Motor Load requirement in excess V f parameter improperly set Overload of the capability of the motor Maing ean e Continuous operation at low speed e The load is in excess of what the motor can deliver OLR Resistor Excessive current at the e Deceleration time is too short Overload Dynamic Braking Resistor DBR configuration improperly set OP Overvoltage DC bus voltage exceeds e ASD attempting to start into a spinning motor after specifications a momentary power loss e Incoming 3 phase power is above the specified range e Decel time is too short e Voltage spikes at the 3 phase input install inductive filter e DBR required e DBR resistance value is too high e DBR function is turned off e Overvoltage Stall feature is turned off
309. unction is normally used for over travel con ditions 59 Position Control Reverse Limit LS Connecting this terminal to CC will immediately stop the drive and hold its position If the connection remains the drive will time out and trip This function is normally used for over travel con ditions 60 Light Load High Speed Operation Enable Activating this terminal sets the lower limit of an output frequency range in which the Light load High speed function may be used see F330 The Light load High speed function accelerates the output frequency of the ASD to the speed setting established in F341 for the duration of the activation 61 Snap Stop Control Enable TBD 62 Pre excite Motor Connecting this terminal to CC applies an excitation current to the motor holds shaft station ary for the duration of the connection 63 System Consistent Sequence BC braking command TBD 64 System Consistent Sequence B braking release Connecting this input terminal to CC initiates the brake release command This setting requires that another discrete input terminal be set to 65 System Consistent Sequence BA braking answer to complete the brake release command and to convey the status of the braking system to the user or to a dependent subsystem Once the braking release function is initiated the Trouble Internal Timer begins to count down Trouble Internal Timer value is set at F63
310. up to allow the system to receive Speed control input at the VI II input terminal e Program gt Fundamental Parameters gt Standard Mode Selection gt aN Frequency Mode 1 gt VI II VINI Speed Ref e Program gt Fundamental Parameters gt Standard Mode Selection gt Command Mode gt Use Control Terminal Strip e Set VI II Speed Reference 1 F201 the input signal level that represents VI II Speed Frequency 1 H CAD F201 Units Frequency Settings Set VI II Speed Frequency 1 F202 0 0 e Set VIMI Speed Reference 2 F203 the input signal level that represents VI II Speed Frequency 2 e Set VI II Speed Frequency 2 F204 Provide a Run command F and or R F202 Note Once set as the VI input voltage or the II current changes the output frequency of the ASD will vary in accordance with the above settings This parameter sets VI II Speed Reference 1 and is the input signal level that is associated with the setting of VIII Speed Frequency 1 while operating in the Speed Control mode VI II Input Torque Control Setup Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Torque control input Note at the VI II input terminal e Program gt Fundamental Parameters gt Standard Mode Selection gt Frequency Mode 1 gt VI II e Program gt Fundamental Parameters gt Standard Mode Selection gt Command Mode gt Use Control Terminal S
311. us or minus value for the Run Frequency thus Minum 0 establishing a frequency band Maximum Max Freq F011 During acceleration the drive will not output a signal to the motor until the Units Hz lower level of the band is reached During deceleration the drive will continue to output the programmed deceleration output signal to the motor until the lower level of the band is reached at which time the output will go to 0 0 Hz Run Frequency Hysteresis Direct Access Number F242 Program gt Special Control Parameters gt Frequency Control Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 This parameter provides a plus or minus value for the Run Frequency setting F241 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 30 0 Units Hz End Frequency Direct Access Number F243 Program Special Control Parameters gt Frequency Control Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 This parameter sets the lowest frequency that the drive will recognize during Ch ble During R y deceleration before the drive goes to 0 0 Hz a a Saree Minimum 0 0 Maximum 30 0 Units Hz 0 Hz Dead Band Signal Direct Access Number F244 Program gt Special Control Parameters gt Special Parameters gt Dead Parameter Type Numerical Band of 0 Hz Frequency Factory Default 0 0 This parameter sets an output frequency threshold that until the commanded Changeable Dunne Run Yes frequency surpasses this
312. y 2 90 PG Speed Reference 1 89 PG Speed Reference 2 90 Phase Loss 37 PID feedback 108 155 PID Value 30 POFF 170 Position Completion Range 111 Position Difference Limit Droop Pulses Allowed 148 Position Loop Gain 110 Positional Err 175 Post Compensation Frequency 30 Power Running Torque Limit 1 121 PP 8 10 Preferences 32 Preset Speed 1 52 Preset Speed 10 97 Preset Speed 11 97 Preset Speed 12 97 Preset Speed 13 97 Preset Speed 14 97 Preset Speed 15 97 Preset Speed 2 52 Preset Speed 3 53 Preset Speed 4 53 Preset Speed 5 53 Preset Speed 6 53 Preset Speed 7 53 Preset Speed 8 96 Preset Speed 9 96 Preset Speed Direction 1 112 Preset Speed Direction 10 114 Preset Speed Direction 11 114 Preset Speed Direction 12 114 Preset Speed Direction 13 114 Preset Speed Direction 14 114 Preset Speed Direction 15 115 Preset Speed Direction 2 112 Preset Speed Direction 3 113 Preset Speed Direction 4 113 Preset Speed Direction 5 113 Preset Speed Direction 6 113 Preset Speed Direction 7 113 Preset Speed Direction 8 113 Preset Speed Direction 9 114 Preset Speed Mode 36 39 Preset Speeds 35 39 Program Menu Navigation 32 HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Program Mode 32 Prohibit Initializing User Parameters During Typeform Initi
313. y User notification events are not error conditions and only convey active system functions to the user Table 9 EOI Function Description Atn Autotune Active Atn indicates that the Autotune function is active If the initial Autotune fails for any reason an automatic retry is initiated if Other Motor is selected at parameter F413 db or dbOn DC Braking Active This code conveys that the DC Injection function being carried out The display shows db when braking and dbOn when the Shaft Stationary function is active HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual 171 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Trips Faults A Trip is an ASD response to a Fault though Fault and Trip are sometimes used interchangeably A Trip is a safety feature that disables the ASD system in the event that a subsystem of the ASD is malfunctioning Listed in Table 10 are the possible Faults that may cause a Trip and the possible causes When a Trip is incurred the system displays the Fault screen The Fault screen identifies the active Fault Table 10 Fault Screen Display Possible Causes Inverter ASD OL Acceleration time is too short DC Injection current is too high V f setting needs to be adjusted Motor running during restart ASD or the motor is improperly matched to the application Autotuning Err Autotune readings that are significantly incons
314. ype Selection List Factory Default Preset Speed Cmd 3 Changeable During Run No HX7 ASD Programming and Operation Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F118 F120 S4 Input Terminal Assignment Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters Input Terminal Assignment gt S4 This parameter selects the functionality of the S4 input terminal In addition the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This parameter sets the programmable S4 terminal to 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 5 on pg 162 Direct Access Number F118 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Emergency Off Changeable During Run No S5 Input Terminal Assignment Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters gt Input Terminal Assignment gt S5 This parameter selects the functionality of the S5 input terminal Note The S5 input terminal may be used without the ASD Multicom option board Without the ASD Multicom option board the S5 terminal assignment information will be stored in volatile memory The terminal assignment information will be lost if the system is powered down or reset In addition the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This parameter sets the programmable S5 terminal to 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 5 on pg 162

Programming & Operation Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Programming &amp; Operation Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Programming & Operation Manual